Garmin | G1000: Piper PA-34-220T Seneca | Garmin G1000: Piper PA-34-220T Seneca G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the PA-34-220T Seneca

Garmin G1000: Piper PA-34-220T Seneca G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the PA-34-220T Seneca
G1000 Integrated Avionic System
®
l0
20
7
5
D.C.
ELEC.
29.9
4
3
10
5
VERTICAL SPEED
100 FEET PER MINUTE
15
UP
20
DOWN
TURN COORDINATOR
5
10
NO PITCH
INFORMATION
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411 f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House,
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
190-01404-01
Revision B
10
240
10
11900
225
11800
210
11700
10
10
200
1
500
1
11600
2
360‘
190
N
TAS 269KT
33
29.86IN
3
GPS
ENR
W
E
12
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200 f:913.397.8282
15
12000
250
2
6
R
Piper PA-34-220T
Seneca
0
2 MIN.
In Hg
29.8
6
L
2
ALT
30
8
24
l0
260
S
Piper PA-34-220T
Seneca
21
20
20
l0
®
l0
20
1
18000
15
9
FEET
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
100
PILOT’S GUIDE
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2013-2014 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1981.01 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed when
comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9LR, U.K
Tel: 44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: 44 (0) 23 8052 4004 Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® and G1000® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts®, SafeTaxi®, and Garmin ESP™ are trademarks
of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
June 2014
Printed in the U.S.A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G1000 system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the G1000 Integrated Avionics System in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual
sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: Do not use the system to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. The illustrations in this guide are
only examples. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding any thunderstorm identified as severe of giving intense radar echo by
at least 20 miles.
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the G1000 within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby
thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed
in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to
coordinate the revised DQRs.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Report An Aviation Data Error Report.’
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-01404-00
Revision
A
Date
5/22/13
190-01404-01
A
3/20/14
i – I-6
Added Garmin AFCS
Added Becker ADF
190-01404-01
B
6/30/14
i – I-6
Removed USP
Added Pitch Trim in Motion message
Updated System Software number
Added database notes
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Page Range
i – I-6
Initial release
Description
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 6
System Power-up...................................................... 7
System Operation..................................................... 8
Display Operation.......................................................... 8
G1000 System Annunciations......................................... 9
System Status.............................................................. 10
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 12
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 13
G1000 Controls....................................................... 18
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 18
Additional MFD Controls (Garmin AFCS Installed)........... 20
Softkey Function.......................................................... 21
Accessing G1000 Functionality............................ 29
Menus........................................................................ 29
Data Entry.................................................................. 29
Page Groups............................................................... 31
System Settings........................................................... 35
System Utilities............................................................ 45
Display Backlighting.............................................. 49
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 54
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 54
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 56
Altimeter.................................................................... 57
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 61
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 61
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 62
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 67
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 75
Temperature Displays................................................... 75
Wind Data.................................................................. 76
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 77
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 78
System Annunciations.................................................. 78
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 79
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 79
TAWS Annunciations.................................................... 80
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 80
vi
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 81
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 81
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 83
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 83
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 84
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
3.1 Engine Display........................................................ 86
3.2 Engine Page............................................................ 88
Electrical..................................................................... 90
Cylinder Head Temperatures......................................... 90
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 91
Oil Pressure and Temperature Gauges............................ 93
Systems...................................................................... 93
Fuel Quantity.............................................................. 94
Flap Indications........................................................... 94
Landing Gear Indications.............................................. 95
EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)................................... 96
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 97
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 98
GMA 1347 Audio Panel Controls................................. 100
COM Operation..................................................... 102
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 102
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 103
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 104
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 105
Auto-tuning from the MFD......................................... 106
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 109
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 110
Volume..................................................................... 110
NAV Operation...................................................... 111
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 111
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 112
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 114
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 118
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 119
ADF/DME Tuning (Optional)........................................ 120
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 124
Transponder Controls................................................. 124
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 125
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 127
IDENT Function......................................................... 128
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 129
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 130
Power-Up.................................................................. 130
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 130
Speaker.................................................................... 130
Intercom................................................................... 131
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 133
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 133
Split COM Operation.................................................. 134
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 135
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 136
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 137
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 137
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 137
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 137
PFD Failure (Reversionary Mode)................................ 137
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction.......................................................... 139
Navigation Status Box................................................ 140
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 142
Map Orientation........................................................ 142
Map Range............................................................... 144
Map Panning............................................................. 146
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 150
Topography............................................................... 151
Map Symbols............................................................ 154
Airways.................................................................... 160
Track Vector.............................................................. 162
Wind Vector.............................................................. 163
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 164
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 165
Field of View (SVS)..................................................... 166
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 167
5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 168
Airports.................................................................... 169
Intersections............................................................. 176
NDBs........................................................................ 178
190-01404-01 Rev. B
VORs........................................................................ 180
User Waypoints......................................................... 182
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 188
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 192
5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 198
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 199
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 204
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 206
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 209
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 216
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 218
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 221
Parallel Track............................................................. 223
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 226
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 227
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 228
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 230
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 230
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 235
Altitude Constraints................................................... 237
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 241
Departures................................................................ 241
Arrivals .................................................................... 244
Approaches .............................................................. 246
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 254
Trip Planning............................................................. 254
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 258
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 262
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 290
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather................................................. 294
Activating Services..................................................... 294
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 295
SiriusXM Weather Abnormal Operations...................... 329
6.2 Garmin Connext Weather.................................... 331
Registering the Iridium Satellite System....................... 331
Registering Garmin Connext Weather.......................... 332
Accessing Garmin Connext Weather Products............... 333
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 341
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Garmin Connext Weather Products.............................. 345
Abnormal Operations................................................. 361
6.3 Airborne Color Weather Radar........................... 363
System Description.................................................... 363
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar................ 363
Safe Operating Distance............................................. 367
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup............................................. 368
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 369
Ground Mapping and Interpretation............................ 380
System Status............................................................ 381
6.4 Stormscope Lightning.......................................... 382
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 382
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 386
6.5 Terrain Proximity.................................................. 387
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 387
6.6 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 392
Profile View Display................................................... 393
6.7 Terrain-SVS............................................................ 396
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 397
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 399
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 401
System Status............................................................ 404
6.8 TAWS-B.................................................................. 405
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 406
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 409
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 411
System Status............................................................ 417
6.9 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 419
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 420
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 422
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 423
System Status............................................................ 424
6.10 GTS 825 Traffic...................................................... 427
Theory of operation................................................... 427
TAS Alerts................................................................. 430
System Test............................................................... 431
Operation................................................................. 432
viii
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 Basic Autopilot Operation................................... 442
7.2 AFCS Controls....................................................... 443
7.3 Flight Director Operation.................................... 445
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 445
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 446
Flight Director Modes................................................. 447
Command Bars.......................................................... 447
7.4 Vertical Modes...................................................... 448
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 449
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 450
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 451
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 452
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 453
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)...................... 454
Glidepath Mode (GP)................................................. 458
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 460
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes..................... 461
7.5 Lateral Modes....................................................... 462
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 463
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 464
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 465
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 467
7.6 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 469
Flight Control............................................................ 469
Engagement.............................................................. 470
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 470
Disengagement......................................................... 471
Level Mode............................................................... 472
7.7 Example Flight Plan............................................. 473
Departure................................................................. 473
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 475
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 476
Descent.................................................................... 476
Approach.................................................................. 480
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.8 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 486
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 486
Overspeed Protection................................................. 487
7.9 Abnormal Operation............................................ 488
Suspected Autopilot Malfunction................................ 488
Overpowering Autopilot Servos................................... 488
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 490
SVT Operation........................................................... 491
SVT Features............................................................. 493
Field of View............................................................. 502
SafeTaxi................................................................. 504
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 507
ChartView.............................................................. 510
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 511
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 512
Chart Options............................................................ 520
Day/Night View......................................................... 526
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 528
FliteCharts............................................................. 531
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 532
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 533
Chart Options............................................................ 540
Day/Night View......................................................... 544
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 546
Airport Directory.................................................. 549
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.550
Satellite Telephone Services............................... 552
Registering the System............................................... 552
Telephone Communication......................................... 552
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 558
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment............ 570
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 570
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 572
190-01404-01 Rev. B
8.8 Scheduler............................................................... 575
8.9 Flight Data Logging............................................. 577
8.10 Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)............ 579
Roll Engagement....................................................... 580
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 582
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 582
8.11 Abnormal Operation............................................ 583
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 583
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 583
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 584
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 587
CAS Messages........................................................... 589
System Messages...................................................... 590
Comparator Annunciations......................................... 590
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations............................. 591
Miscellaneous Annunciations...................................... 591
G1000 System Message Advisories.............................. 594
Voice Alerts............................................................... 606
AFCS Alerts............................................................... 607
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 608
Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations..................... 608
TAWS-B ALERTS......................................................... 609
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations.......................... 610
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 610
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 611
Database Management................................................. 613
Navigation Databases................................................ 614
Garmin Databases..................................................... 618
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................. 625
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 633
General TIS Information................................................ 637
Map Symbols.................................................................. 639
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 Integrated Avionics System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication,
and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
EIS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GDU 1040 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker Beacon Receiver
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 69A Data Link Receiver
• GWX 68 Weather Radar
• GTS 825 Traffic Advisory System
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
• GDU 1044/1045 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 80 AFCS Servos
• GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes
KN 63 DME
KR 87 ADF
Becker ADF
WX-500 Stormscope
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs.
The Garmin Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD) and autopilot (AP)
functions of the G1000 system.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the Garmin AFCS.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040 (2) – The left and right GDUs are configured as Primary Flight Displays (PFDs). Both feature 10.4inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with each other through a HighSpeed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an
IAU.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1040/1044/1045 (1) – The middle GDU is configured as a Multi Function Display (MFD). It features
a 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with each other through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Either the GDU 1044 or the GDU 1045 is used when the
Garmin AFCS is installed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• GMA 1347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio,
intercom, and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual
control of display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP Button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and
communicates with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
INDEX
APPENDICES
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hubs, linking all
LRUs with the on-side display. Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, and
system integration microprocessors, and is paired with the on-side display via HSDB connection. The IAUs are
not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GDC 74A (1 or 2) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information
to the system. It communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
• GEA 71 (2) – The Engine Airframe Units receive and process signals from the engine and airframe sensors.
These units communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GTX 33 (1) – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both
IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• GRS 77 (1 or 2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both PFDs and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in Section 1.4, System Operation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
• GMU 44 (1 or 2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing
to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates
with it via an RS-485 digital interface.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDL 69A (1 optional) – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to the
G1000 MFD and PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates
with the MFD via a HSDB connection. A subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service is required to enable
the GDL 69A capability.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GWX 68 (1 optional) – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, through the GDL
69A (or directly to the MFD without a GDL 69A), via HSDB connection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GTS 825 (1 optional) – The GTS 825 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the
inset map of the PFD). The GTS 825 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB connection.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GSR 56 (1 optional) – The Iridium Transceiver provides voice communication by means of pilot and copilot
headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium satellite network. The GSR 56 is connected
to the #2 GIA 63W with an RS-232 digital interface.
• GSA 80 (4) (only with Garmin AFCS option) – The GSA 80 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch
and yaw. These units interface with each GIA 63W.
INDEX
The GSM 86 servo gearboxes are responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80 servo actuators
to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
#3
GDU 1040
(MFD)
or
GDU 1044
(MFD)
or
GDU 1045
(MFD)
GTS 825
(TAS)
GDL 69A
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
#2 GDC 74A
(Air Data
Computer)
KN-63
(DME)
#2 GMA 44
(Magnetometer)
VHF COM
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
#1 GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)
#2 GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)
G/S
WX-500
(Stormscope)
Flight
Director
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Servo Logic
KR-87 or
Becker
(ADF)
VOR/LOC
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
#1 GMA 44
(Magnetometer)
GSR 56
(Iridium)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
#1 GDC 74A
(Air Data
Computer)
#2
GDU 1040
(PFD2)
GWX 68
(Weather
Radar)
GMA 1347
(Audio
Panel)
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
#1
GDU 1040
(PFD1)
AFCS Mode
Logic
#1 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe I/F)
Servo Logic
AFCS
#2 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe I/F)
GTX 33
(Transponder)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GSA 80 (4)
(Garmin AFCS
Servos)
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
APPENDICES
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
Figure 1-1 System Block Diagram
INDEX
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin optional/additional equipment shown in Figure 1-1, consult the
applicable optional interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with
the operation of this additional equipment.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates, terrain database storage, and to provide for the import or export of data including
flight plans, pilot profiles, and flight data logs.
Installing an SD card:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SD Card Slots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-2 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFDs, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
EIS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the PFDs, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the Power-up screen (Figure 1-3) displays the following information:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System software version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Copyright
• Obstacle database name and expiration date
• Checklist file name
• Navigation database name and expiration date
• Basemap land database name and version
• Airport Directory name and expiration date
• SafeTaxi database name and expiration date
• FliteCharts database information or
• ChartView database information
• Terrain database name and version
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
INDEX
Figure 1-3 PFD Initialization
Figure 1-4 Example MFD Power-up Screen
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for detailed descriptions of all annunciations and alerts. The G1000 System alerts
the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses normal and reversionary G1000
display operation, AHRS modes, GPS receiver operation, and G1000 System Annunciations.
EIS
DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFDs (see Section 1.7). In
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display(s).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In normal operating mode, the PFDs present graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
AFCS
Figure 1-5 System Normal Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reversionary mode is a mode of operation in which all important flight information is presented identically on
at least one of the remaining displays (see Figure 1-6). Transition to reversionary mode should be straightforward
for the pilot, for flight parameters are presented in the same format as in normal mode.
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display(s) in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
APPENDICES
• PFD1 failure – MFD and PFD2 remain in normal mode.
• MFD failure – Both PFDs automatically switch to reversionary mode.
• PFD2 failure – MFD and PFD1 remain in normal mode.
INDEX
Reversionary mode may be manually activated on all displays by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY
BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed display)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Should the connection between a PFD and the GIA 63W functions become inoperative, the GIA 63W can no
longer communicate with the PFD (refer to Figure 1-1). As a result, the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed PFD or MFD by the GIA 63W are flagged as invalid (red “X”) on the remaining PFD (see Figure 1-7).
The system reverts to backup paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required.
The change to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-7 displays many possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000 power-up, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized
repair facility.
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GRS 77 AHRS or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit
APPENDICES
GDU Software or
Database Mismatch
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Figure 1-7 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GTX 33 Transponder
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label to PFD2
DB (only if three tube system, otherwise will go to MFD1 DB again). PFD 2 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ANN TEST Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
INDEX
Figure 1-8 Example System Status Page
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.
Viewing database information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,
a) Press the DB Softkey (repeat until desired database is shown; MFD1, PFD1, or PFD2).
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s annunciation
tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific alerts.
Testing the system annunciation tone:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
EIS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-9)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
NO
YES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
YES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and
its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every five years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
AFCS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
YES
Air Data Available and Reliable?
Attitude/Heading Invalid
INDEX
Figure 1-9 AHRS Operation
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts. Any
failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red
‘X’ indications over the corresponding flight instruments).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD(s) as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD(s) is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
EIS
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD(s). When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
GPS
Receiver
Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
Figure 1-10 GPS Status Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has acquired
satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS signal. While the aircraft
is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty
acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers
temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the
information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
APPENDICES
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
INDEX
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active.
14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable SBAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS
Status box indicates DISABLED.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed)(WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS capable systems only)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS
EIS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, select the SBAS Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired SBAS system.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-11 Enable/Disable SBAS
AFCS
RAIM PREDICTION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
APPENDICES
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. In most cases
performing RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach may be outside
the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended approach.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach
procedure must be flown.
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
EIS
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier,
facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
AFCS
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
SATELLITE INFORMATION
EIS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram.
This sky view is always oriented north-up, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each satellite
is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification
number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
AFCS
Using the current satellite signal information, they system calculates the aircraft’s GPS position, time,
altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft (displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements
for reference). The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix:
• Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)—A statistical error indication; the radius of a circle centered on an
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of lying
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)—Measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting
better accuracy
APPENDICES
• Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit (HFOM and VFOM)—Measures of horizontal and vertical position
uncertainty; the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS
receiver
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 G1000 CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and
the time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and
the Audio Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. Audio Panel controls are
described in the Audio Panel and CNS section; see the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about
NAV/COM controls.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
17
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
18
10
13
11
14
12
15
16
INDEX
Figure 1-12 PFD/MFD Controls
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3
4
9
CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
13
MENU Key
14
PROC Key
15
ENT Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
APPENDICES
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
AFCS
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
EIS
5
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a
percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
NAV Knob
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Heading Knob
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize
the Selected Heading to the and current heading
Turn to change map range
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
COM Knob
kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically
(EMERG)
into the active frequency field
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
Direct-to Key ( ) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
FPL Key
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large
knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor
System Knob)
location)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
17 Softkey Selection
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Keys
18 ALT Knob
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
FMS Knob
ADDITIONAL MFD CONTROLS (GARMIN AFCS INSTALLED)
GDU 1044
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDU 1045
1
7
1
2
8
2
8
3
9
3
9
4
10
4
10
5
11
5
11
6
12
6
12
INDEX
Figure 1-13 MFD Controls (Garmin AFCS Only)
20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following are only available with the Garmin AFCS AFCS.
1 AP Key
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode.
7 YD Key
Engages/disengages the yaw damper.
8 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.
9 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode.
10 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation Mode.
11 NOSE UP Key
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight
Level Change modes.
12 NOSE DN Key
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5 VS Key
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.
EIS
4 ALT Key
2 FD Key
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3 NAV Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot and flight director. Pressing the AP Key activates
the flight director and engages the autopilot in the default pitch axis and roll axis
modes. Pressing the AP Key again disengages the autopilot and deactivates the flight
director.
Activates/deactivates the flight director only. Pressing the FD Key turns on the flight
director in the default pitch axis and roll axis modes. Pressing the FD Key again
deactivates the flight director and removes the command bars, unless the autopilot
is engaged. If the autopilot is engaged, the FD Key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
AFCS
Large (Outer) Knob
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Small (Inner) Knob
Figure 1-14 Dual Concentric Knob
APPENDICES
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is pressed, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Softkey Selection Box
(using Control Unit)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Softkey
On
Softkey
Names
(Displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Figure 1-15 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
EIS
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and MSG softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on gray
background when selected, and automatically switch back to white text on black background.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to the
previous level. The MSG Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
(optional)
SENSOR
(optional)
PFD
OBS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INSET
CDI
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
MSG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Figure 1-16 Top Level PFD Softkeys
INSET
INSET
AFCS
OFF
DCLTR (3)
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
APPENDICES
WX LGND
DCLTR-3
TRAFFIC
TOPO
INDEX
(optional)
SYN VIS
22
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
(optional) (optional)
PRECIP DL LTNG
Selects desired amount(optional)
of map detail;orcycles through
declutter
levels:
(optional)
or
MSG
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR
BACK
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA dataPress the BACK Softkey to return
TRFC-1
theactive
top-level
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except fortothe
flightsoftkeys.
plan
TERRAIN
DFLTS
STRMSCPWIND
Displays icon and age on the Inset Map for the selected weather products
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map
PFD
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
on Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
(optional)
DME Displays
BRG2
HSI FMT information
MSG
BACK
BRG1Stormscope
ALT(optional)
UNIT STD BARO
on Inset Map
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
the Bearing Information
cycle through
190-01404-01
Guidewindows
for theand
Piper
PA-34-220T Seneca
bearing sources:
Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(optional)
SENSOR
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)
(optional)
PFD
OBS
CDI
XPDR
ADF/DME
IDENT
TMR/REF
Displays Connext™ or FIS-B precipitation on Inset Map (optional)
Displays SiriusXM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
NRST
MSG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
or
INSET
PRECIP
XM LTNG
or
DL LTNG
METAR
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
Displays Connext™
Weather
lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
- GPS
- NAV1on(VOR/LOC)
Displays METAR information
Inset Map (optional)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
INSET
EIS
(optional) (optional)
PRECIP DL LTNG
(optional)
or
or
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND
TOPO
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
MSG
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DCLTR-1
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(optional)
DCLTR-3
Figure 1-17 INSET Softkeys
PFD
WIND
DFLTS
(optional)
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
(optional)
the
Bearing Information
ADF/DME
XPDRthrough
IDENT TMR/REF NRST
ALERTS
windows
and cycle
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
CDI
360 HSI
BACK
ARC HSI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INSET
Displays softkeys for selecting the #1 and #2 AHRS and Air Data Computers (optional)
Selects the #1 Air Data Computer
(optional)
Selects
the #2 Air Data Computer
DME
BRG2
HSI FMT
MSG
BACK
BRG1
ALT UNIT STD BARO
Selects the #1 AHRS
Selects the #2 AHRS
AFCS
ADC1
(optional)
ADC2
SYN VIS
AHRS1
AHRS2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SENSOR
MSG
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
METERS
AHRS2
IN
HPA
BACK
APPENDICES
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top level softkeys.
ALERTS
BACK
MSG
BACK
MSG
Figure 1-18 SENSOR Softkeys
OPTN2
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
190-01404-01 Rev. B
OPTN3
OFF
FPM
XPDR
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T
Seneca
INDEX
OPTN1
MSG
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
EIS
FPM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DFLTS
WIND
OPTN1
OPTN2
OPTN3
OFF
DME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BRG1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HSI FRMT
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2
ALT UNIT
APPENDICES
METERS
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and distance information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
OFF: Removes window
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information windows unavailable)
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and distance information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
OFF: Removes window
Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays
to metric units
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when
selected
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
INDEX
IN
HPA
STD BARO
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Enables/Disables the Flight Path Marker on the PFD when SVS is disabled. Softkey is
available when Synthetic Terrain is disabled and Horizon Heading is enabled.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Wind direction arrow with numeric speed
Wind direction arrow with numeric headwind/tailwind and crosswind speed
Removes wind information from display
Displays/removes the DME Information Window (optional)
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DCLTR-3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
SYN VIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(optional)
(optional)
DFLTS
WIND
DME
BRG1
HSI FMT
BRG2
ALT UNIT STD BARO
BACK
MSG
ARC HSI
METERS
OPTN2
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
OPTN3
HPA
OFF
MSG
BACK
MSG
BACK
MSG
FPM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OPTN1
IN
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
360 HSI
EIS
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
the Bearing Information
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
MSG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-19 PFD ConfigurationXPDR
Softkeys
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
ADSB-TX
BACK
AFCS
STBY
MSG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
MSG
APPENDICES
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
25
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DCLTR-3
OBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI
ADF/DME
XPDR
(optional)
STBY
ON
ALT
WIND
DFLTS
EIS
SYN VIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GND
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VFR
CODE
0—7
BKSP
ADSB-TX
IDENT
OPTN1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TMR/REF
NRST
PATHWAY
MSG
SYN TERR HRZN HDG
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active
leg)
PFD
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation sources on the HSI
Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the ADF and
the DME (optional)
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
(optional)
SelectsBRG
standby
mode (Transponder
does ALT
notUNIT
replySTD
to any
interrogations)
DME
BRG2
HSI FMT
MSG
BARO
BACK
1
Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude
mode (Transponder
repliesSoftkey
to identification
Press thereporting
BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK
to return and
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
altitude interrogations)
the Bearing Information
Manually selects Ground
Mode
(Transponder
windows
and cycle
through does not allow Mode A and Mode C
bearing
sources: squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode
replies, but does permit
acquisition
- NAV1/NAV2
S interrogations)
- GPS
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
MSG
Displays transponder
code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers
entered, one at IN
a time HPA
METERS
BACK
MSG
Enables/disables automatic transmission of ADS-B position and speed
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder
BACK
MSG
OPTN2
OPTN3 return
OFF on the ATC screen
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
MSG
APTSIGNS
FPM
Displays/removes Messages Window
AFCS
XPDR
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY
IDENT
ADSB-TX
BACK
MSG
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
MSG
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
Figure 1-20 XPDR Softkeys
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page softkeys are described
here.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
DCLTR SHW CHRT
MAP
DCLTR
DCLTR-1
EIS
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
(optional) (optional)
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
TERRAIN
(optional) (optional)
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
DL LTNG
or
XM LTNG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PRECIP
or
AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD
(optional)
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
AIRWY HI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENGINE
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
Press the ENGINE softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
Figure 1-21 MFD Softkeys (EIS, Navigation Map Page, and Checklist)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ENGINE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
MAP
EIS
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
or
PRECIP
XM LTNG
or
DL LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
DCLTR (3)
Displays Connext™ precipitation on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays SiriusXM lightning information on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays Connext™ Weather lightning information on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays/removes Graphical METARs on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes METAR legend on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
INDEX
APPENDICES
SHW CHRT
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to exit
page (see the EIS Section for more information)
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used
to zero
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on
Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jetways) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
Displays/removes Stormscope information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation Map (optional)
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all
window/page group operations are described in Section 1.5, G1000 Controls.
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
No Options for
NRST Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-22 Page Menu Examples
AFCS
DATA ENTRY
Alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum descent altitude) are directly
entered into the G1000 using the FMS Knob corresponding to the display (PFD or MFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G1000 tries to predict the desired identifier based
on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the
entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters
of the identifier.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDICES
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob counterclockwise accesses five different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest
(NRST), recently-entered (RECENT), user (USER), and airway (AIRWAY) (AIRWAY available when active leg is
part of an airway). The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information
for the selected waypoint.
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.
a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of waypoints
in the active flight plan (list is titled FPL). If desired, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll through lists
of nearest waypoints (NRST) and recently-entered waypoints (RECENT).
EIS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting at
K, and the digits zero through nine. Afterwards, turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls in the opposite
direction.
b) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
EIS
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The
current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/
Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page
name in the list remains the same.
Active Page Title
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Groups
Figure 1-23 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.There are also several pages
(Airport Information and XM Information pages) which are selected first from within a main page group with
the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In this case, the page remains set
to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map (TAS optional)
Weather Radar (optional)
Stormscope (optional)
Weather Data Link (optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain (Terrain SVS (optional)/
TAWS (optional))
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-24 Map Pages
• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information
(INFO-2 Softkey)
AFCS
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
APPENDICES
Intersection Information
NDB Information
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
INDEX
Figure 1-25 Waypoint Pages
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Weight Planning
Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup 1
System Setup 2 (optional w/ESP)
EIS
XM Satellite pages (optional)
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
XM
Pages
System Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite Phone Pages (optional)
- Telephone
(TEL Softkey)
- SMS
(SMS Softkey)
Satellite
Phone
Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
Figure 1-26 Auxiliary Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maintenance data is continuously recorded by the Central Maintenance Computer (CMC). At the discretion
of the Aircraft Manufacturer, this data may be displayed on an OEM DIAGNOSTICS Page accessible from within
the AUX Page Group.
• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
AFCS
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
APPENDICES
Nearest Airspaces
INDEX
Figure 1-27 Nearest Pages
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan Catalog
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)
Figure 1-28 Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
AFCS
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach Loading
INDEX
Figure 1-29 Procedure Loading Pages
Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
The System Setup 1 Page allows management of the following system parameters:
• Date/time
• Baro transition alert
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Arrival alerts
• COM channel spacing
(see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)
• CDI/Baro Synchronization)
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio alerts
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
EIS
• Airspace alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Displayed navigation angle reference, temperature,
and position settings
• MFD Navigation Status Box fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-30 System Setup 1 Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
Or:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
PILOT PROFILES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen (Figure 1-4). The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, deleted, imported, or exported.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
AFCS
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
If an SD card is inserted into the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card into the
system, or exported from the system to the SD card.
AFCS
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.
Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
Import Successful
AFCS
Figure 1-31 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
APPENDICES
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
EIS
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-32 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
DATE/TIME
AFCS
The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFDs. Time and date format (local 12-hr,
local 24-hr, or UTC) are modified on the System Setup Page. Universal Coordinated Time (UTC; also called
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals
and cannot be changed. An offset is provided to add or subtract the desired amount of time (hours:minutes)
from UTC to define current local time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Configuring the system time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted (for local time formats).
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens can be changed on the System Setup
Page.
Changing a display units setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted.
Distance and
Speed
Metric
Nautical*
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Feet*
Meters
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
Temperature
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*
All temperatures on PFD(s)
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Category
Settings
Navigation Angle Magnetic*
True
APPENDICES
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Position
Pounds*
N/A
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
Exceptions
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
* Default setting
INDEX
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Status Page)
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE ALERTS
• Class B/TMA
• Class D
• MOA (Military)
• Class C/TCA
• Restricted
• Other airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alert feature provides a message alert when the aircraft is approaching or near a controlled or
special-use airspace. The altitude buffer setting increases the range above or below an airspace for which an
alert is generated; the default value is 200 feet. Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off from
the System Setup Page:
EIS
Turning Airspace Alerts off does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace
boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
AFCS
Arrival alerts provide notification upon reaching a specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to
waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan). Once this trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached,
the Navigation Status Box on the PFD(s) display(s) an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message.
Enabling/disabling arrival alerting and changing the trigger distance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
6) Enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
The gender of the voice used to announce voice alerts is shown on the System Setup 1 Page. See the
Appendices for voice alerts.
By default, the Navigation Status Box on the MFD is set to display ground speed (GS), distance to next
waypoint (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), and enroute safe altitude (ESA). These four data fields can be
changed to display the following information:
EIS
• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
AFCS
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Navigation Status Box on the PFD(s) is not affected by these changes; flight plan, distance, and bearing
information are displayed at all times.
Changing the information shown in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the data options list and press the ENT Key.
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-33 Navigation Status Box (MFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS CDI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the scale for the Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI) when GPS is the selected navigation source and also displays the current system value for the
CDI scale. The range values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is
‘Auto’ (refer to the CDI description in the Flight Instruments Section for information on CDI scaling).
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher scale settings are not selected during
any phase of flight. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow
the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phase.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm, Auto) and press the ENT Key.
COM CONFIGURATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NEAREST AIRPORTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“any” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (any, hard only, hard/soft, water) and press the
ENT Key.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI/BARO SYNCHRONIZATION
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on synchronizing both PFD’s Course Deviation Indicators
and the altimeter barometric settings.
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM UTILITIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset. A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder
messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Messages Window on the PFD(s) (see Figure 1-35).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-34 Utility Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TIMERS
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
EIS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, measured from system power-up or aircraft lift off.
The displayed departure time can also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in
which the time is displayed is controlled from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”, “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”). Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the
message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches
zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once
the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer
countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
APPENDICES
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD(s) and cause the ALERTS Softkey label
to change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges
the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message list.
PFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-35 PFD Alerts Window
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Backlighting of the PFD, MFD and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually. The automatic
setting (default) uses photocells to adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are preconfigured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. In normal
display mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFDs. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from
the remaining display(s).
Adjusting display backlighting manually:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’. No
other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the MENU Key
while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
5) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting key backlighting manually:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
9) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
PFD
Figure 1-36 PFD Setup Menu
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
49
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
NOTE: The Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on
selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear
on the display during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
Two Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) feature large horizons, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFDs and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFDs:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Indicated airspeed
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Vspeed reference bugs
– Navigation source
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Altimeter, showing
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Trend vector
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Reference altitude
• Timer/References Window, showing
– Generic timer
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA)
– Vspeed values
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
AFCS
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– True airspeed
• Wind data
The PFDs also display various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21
20
19
1
18
17
16
2
EIS
15
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
14
3
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
7
9
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
15
Reference Altitude Bug
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
16
Altimeter
6
ISA Temperature Deviation
17
Reference Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16
15
2
14
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
13
12
EIS
11
3
10
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9
4
8
5
7
9
CAS Window
2
Traffic Annunciation
10
Selected Course
3
Selected Heading
11
4
Wind Data Box
Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
12 Vertical Deviation Indication
5
Inset Map
13
Reversionary Sensor Window
6
Bearing Information Windows
14
Comparator Window
7
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Flight Plan Window
15
VNV Target Altitude
16
Terrain Annunciation
AFCS
AFCS Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The ground speed is displayed in knots to the left of the true
airspeed. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The
minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots,
with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer.
The pointer remains black until reaching never exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Airspeed
Vspeed
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
Red
Pointer
at VNE
VYSE
Blue Line
Low
Speed
Range
VMCA
Red Line
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A color-coded (red, white, green, yellow”) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote
flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is also
present for low speed awareness.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Landing VSpeeds (F10, F25, F40, VX, and VY) and the Takeoff Vspeed (VR) bugs can be turned on/off from
the Timer/References Window. When active (on), the speed bugs are displayed at their respective locations to
the right of the airspeed scale.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turning Vspeeds bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Timer/References Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Timer/References Window
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menu
Vspeed bugs can be turned on or off and values restored all at once or by category (takeoff and landing).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Modifying Vspeeds (on, off, restore defaults):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed in
a separate box above the Selected Altitude. See the AFCS Section for more information about Selected Altitude.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments..
Reference
Altitude
(Meters)
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Indicated
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reference
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
APPENDICES
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
AFCS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the barometric altimeter settings differ between PFDs, the readouts turn yellow. Once the settings are
synchronized (BARO turned on), they remain synchronized until the setting is turned off.
Synchronizing the altimeter barometric pressure settings:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight BARO in the Synchronization box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Barometric Settings not Synchronized on
PFD displayed in yellow
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-9 Baro Synchronization
(AUX - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing cyan barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-10 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-11) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels
at 1000 and 2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or
descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
EIS
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when
SBAS is available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-11) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data,
for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-13) appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Full-scale deflection of two dots is 1000 feet.
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical Glideslope
Speed
Indicator
Pointer
Glipepath
Indicator
APPENDICES
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
INDEX
Figure 2-11 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Figure 2-12 Glideslope Indicator
Figure 2-13 Glidepath Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond connected to a gray dashed line. The HSI also presents
turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a
360˚ compass rose and a 140˚ arc.
Changing the HSI display format:
EIS
1) Press the PFD Softkey
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
15
14
13
1
12
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
11
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3
4
10
5
9
6
9
7
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
To/From Indicator
11
Course Pointer
4
Navigation Source
12
Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Lubber Line
Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Course Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending
on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead (GPS, VOR,
OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Current Track Indicator
Flight Phase
Annunciation
EIS
Navigation
Source
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course
Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-15 Arc HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The cyan bug
on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the Heading
Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
AFCS
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Current Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current Track Indicator
APPENDICES
Selected
Course
Selected
Heading
Bug
Selected
Heading
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications (True)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
INDEX
Figure 2-18 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURN RATE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Standard
Turn Rate
EIS
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Half-standard
Turn Rate
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-19 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
NOTE: ADF radio installation is optional.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are singleline (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the
navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a
white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Bearing 1
Pointer
Frequency
Distance
AFCS
Tuning Mode
Bearing 2
Pointer
DME Information Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to
Bearing Source
No
Waypoint
Selected
Station
Identifier
APPENDICES
Bearing
Pointer
Source
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Pointer
Bearing
Icon
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-20 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-20) are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
EIS
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio installation is optional).
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AFCS
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360º HSI
EIS
Arc HSI
Scale
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation
Source
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CDI
Crosstrack
Error
Figure 2-21 Course Deviation Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow
Indicates
Navigation
Source
Selected on
Both PFDs
is not
Synchronized
APPENDICES
Figure 2-22 Navigation Sources
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
EIS
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-23 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
AFCS
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the same VOR/LOC navigation source is selected on both PFDs, the navigation source annunciation turns
yellow on both displays if not synchronized (Figure 2-22). Once the CDIs are synchronized (CDI Synchronization
turned on), they remain synchronized until the selection is turned off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Synchronizing the CDIs:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight CDI in the Synchronization box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-24 CDI Synchronization
(AUX - System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
Figure 2-25 GPS CDI Setting
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-26, Table 2-1).
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Enroute
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3
0
3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure
Dep
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Missed
Approach
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-26 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-27 and 2-28). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
71
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
EIS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-27 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-27)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-28)
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
INDEX
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-29 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-30. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-30 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset Map and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFDs also display various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in
Reversionary Display Mode. Both are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-31 Temperature Displays
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
Figure 2-32 Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is the
Selected
Navigation
Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Phase of
Flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-33 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The System Messages Window conveys messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000
System. When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to flash
until selected, which opens the System Messages Window and acknowledges the message(s) which initiated
the flashing. When the window is open, messages for which the trigger conditions no longer exist turn gray.
Messages generated while the window is open are not automatically displayed, but cause the MSG Softkey to
begin flashing again. Pressing the MSG Softkey while the System Messages Window is open closes the window,
unless the MSG Softkey is flashing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors
exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the
discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a MISCOMP (miscompare). If one or both of the
sensed values are unavailable, it is annunciated as a NO COMP (no compare).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations
reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1,
ADC2, AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on each
PFD. With certain types of sensor failures, the system may make some sensor selections automatically. The GPS
sensor cannot be switched manually.
Comparator
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
CAS Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
System
Messages
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 2-34 G1000 Alerting System
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker
EIS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-35 Marker Beacon Annunciations
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the MFD Navigation Map Page, and various other
MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected,
the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five
seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is heard, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed. Refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment.
AFCS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic
Symbols
APPENDICES
Figure 2-36 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD at the top left of the Altimeter.
Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and annunciations.
Figure 2-37 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
AFCS
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and audio alerts when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. Altitude Alerting is based on the
altitude information shown on PFD1. Altitude Alerting is independent of the AFCS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an audio tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
APPENDICES
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds, and the system generates an audio tone.
INDEX
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Figure 2-38 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
available when TAWS-B alerting has been inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
Figure 2-39 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the REFERENCES Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If desired, the system can also compensate this altitude based on a pilot-supplied temperature at the
destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases the
displayed MDA/DH accordingly.
When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is
within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual
annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
AFCS
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’
or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the selected altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta
for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text become white.
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become yellow and the audio alert, “Minimums.
Minimums”, is heard.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
APPENDICES
INDEX
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-40 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the barometric (BARO) or temperature compensated (TEMP COMP) barometric
altitude. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (BARO or TEMP COMP from zero to 16,000 feet). If TEMP
COMP is selected, a field for entering the temperature at the destination will appear. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight this field, and use the small FMS Knob to enter the temperature (from -59º C
to +59º C.) The system increases or decreases the displayed MDA/DH altitude based on this temperature.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-41 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD, or
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window on the MFD. There is only one compensation temperature
for the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and
the minimums. Refer to the Flight Management section for information about applying temperature
compensation to approach altitudes.
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
2-42). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for five seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-42 Example HSI Annunciations
AFCS
In Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode the CDI appears yellow when GPS is the selected navigation source. After 20
minutes of continuous operation in DR Mode, the system then removes the CDI. The following items on the
PFD are then shown in yellow in DR Mode.
• CDI (removed after 20 minutes)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
APPENDICES
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose High
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• AFCS Annunciations
• Flight director Command Bars
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Inset Map
– Timer/References
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Nearest Airports
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind data
– Flight Plan
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Messages
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course readout
– Procedures
• Ground Speed
• Transponder Status Box
– ADF/DME Tuning
• True Airspeed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-43 Pitch Attitude Warnings
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
INDEX
APPENDICES
• System Time
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters during all phases of flight using the following:
• The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays electrical, fuel, engine, and flight control information on the
left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD). EIS information can also be fully expanded to an entire page by
pressing the ENGINE Softkey or turning the large FMS Knob to select the EIS - Engine Page.
EIS
In combination with the EIS, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used to
inform the crew of aberrant flight conditions. The system also provides an improved level of maintenance data
for the ground crew.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-1 MFD with EIS display
APPENDICES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed
across the instrument.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
1
EICAS
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
8
AFCS
9
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
APPENDICES
12
13
Figure 3-3 Engine Display when Engine Page is displayed
INDEX
Figure 3-2 Engine Display
86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Propeller Sync Indicator
Points towards the higher-speed propeller when the propellers are out of
sync.
4
Turbo Inlet Temperature
Indicator (TIT °F)
Displays the temperature for the right and left turbo inlets in °F
5
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
6
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
7
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(OIL °F)
8
Alternator Current(ALTR
AMPS)
Displays each alternator current in amperes
9
Voltage (VOLTS)
Displays the bus voltage.
10
Battery Current(BATT
AMPS)
Displays the battery current in amperes
11
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side of a standard fuel
tank.
12
Flap Position (FLAPS)
Displays flap position in degrees
13
Landing Gear Status
(LANDING GEAR)
Displays landing gear status
AFCS
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Tachometer (RPM)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS - Engine Page displays all engine, fuel, fuel calculation, electrical, and trim information. To access
this page, press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob and select the EIS - Engine Page.
ENGINE
EICAS
EIS
ENGINE
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
Select the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 3-4 Engine Page Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
Level 1
ENGINE
Level 2
ENGINE
Description
LEAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DEC
FUEL
LEAN
ENGINE
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
BACK
ASSIST
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit
page
(optional)
Decreases displayed
fuel remaining in 1-gal
increments BACK
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
CO RST
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Selectfuel
the BACK
Softkey
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum
capacity
forto aircraft and fuel used
return to the top-level softkeys.
to zero
15
14
13
1
AFCS
2
3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4
5
6
12
APPENDICES
7
8
11
INDEX
9
10
Figure 3-5 Engine Page
88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Turbo Inlet Temperature
Indicator (TIT °F)
Displays the temperature for the right and left turbo inlets in °F
5
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
6
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
7
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(OIL °F)
8
Flap Position (FLAPS)
Displays flap position in degrees
9
Landing Gear Status
(LANDING GEAR)
Displays landing gear status
10
Fuel Calculations Group
(FUEL CALC)
Displays calculated fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), and range
(in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency (in statute miles per
gallon, MPG) based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer
11
Systems Group
(SYSTEMS)
Displays oxygen in pounds per square inch (OXYGEN PSI), vacuum in
inches of Mercury (VACUUM IN HG), and propeller heat in amperes
(PROP HEAT AMPS)
12
Engine Hours (TACH
TIME)
Displays the total time in hours the engine has been in service
13
Displays head temperatures for all cylinders in °F
Cylinder Head
Temperature Bar Graph
(CHT °F)
14
Electrical Group
(ELECTRICAL)
Displays alternator (ALTR AMPS) and battery (BATT AMPS) currents in
amperes and bus voltage (VOLTS)
15
Fuel Quantity Gauges
(L/R FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the total amount of fuel and the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for
each side of a standard fuel tank
APPENDICES
4
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Points towards the higher-speed propeller when the propellers are out of
sync.
AFCS
Propeller Sync Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Tachometer (RPM)
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DC current for the left and right alternators (pointers labeled “L” and “R”) and voltage for the DC bus are
shown along color-coded horizontal scales, with readouts above the scale. The ammeter displays the battery
load in amperes (amps) along a horizontal scale, with a white tick mark indicating zero amps. The horizontal
scales and pointers will not appear in Reversionary Mode.
EICAS
EIS
Alternator
Current
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bus Voltage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ammeter
Figure 3-6 Electrical Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURES
Cylinder head (CHT) temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit are displayed for each cylinder using bar graphs and
digital readouts on the Engine Page. Head temperatures are shown in °F; a readout for each cylinder is shown
at the top of the graph. A cylinder with a normal range CHT appears as a white bar, while a warning range is
shown as a red bar.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Cylinder Head
Temperatures
INDEX
Figure 3-7 Cylinder Head Temperatures (Normal Range)
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Warning
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-8 Cylinder Head Temperatures (Warning Range)
FUEL CALCULATIONS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency
(in statute miles per gallon, MPG) are calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range also takes into account the aircraft’s heading and the wind direction
and speed.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
On the Engine Page, use the DEC FUEL and INC FUEL softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (GAL REM).
AFCS
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
On the Engine Page, select the RST FUEL Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to the
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft and fuel used to zero.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Set Fuel Remaining
Calculated Fuel Used
Calculated Endurance
Calculated Range
Fuel Efficiency
Figure 3-9 Fuel Calculations Group
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based on the endurance (ENDUR), heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and
speed. The solid green circle represents the range until all the remaining fuel is depleted. The dashed green
circle indicates the aircraft range until only reserve fuel remains. Once on reserve fuel, the range is indicated
by a solid yellow circle.
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by
the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EICAS
EIS
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled the Fuel Range Ring appears on the Navigation
Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map.
Press the MENU
Key to Display
Navigation Map
Page Setup Menu
Total Range
(Based on Endurance)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Time to
Reserve Fuel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Range to Reserve Fuel
(Based on Endurance
Minus Reserve Fuel Time)
Set Flight Time
Remaining on
Reserve Fuel
(Reserve Fuel Time)
AFCS
Difference of
Ranges Based on
Reserve Fuel Time
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-10 Fuel Range Ring and Setup
Enabling/disabling the Fuel Range Ring and selecting a reserve fuel time:
1) Display the Navigation Map Page (press and hold the CLR Key for 2 seconds to quickly select this map).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the reserve fuel time, how long the aircraft can fly after reaching the
reserve fuel.
8) Enter the desired reserve fuel time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAUGES
EIS
Engine oil pressure and temperature for each engine are shown along horizontal bar indicators. Oil pressure
is shown in pounds per square inch (psi) and temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F). If the oil pressure pointer
enters the yellow band, a caution is issued. If the oil pressure or oil temperature pointers enter the red band,
a warning is issued.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-11 Oil Pressure and Temperature Gauges
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The oxygen tank pressure gauge (OXYGEN PSI) displays pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) along a
horizontal bar indicator. If the oxygen pressure pointer enters the yellow band, a caution is issued for low
oxygen tank pressure.
The vacuum gauge (VACUUM IN HG) displays the amount of suction in the vacuum system measured in
inches of mercury (in Hg) along a horizontal slider next to a readout. If the vacuum suction is below 4.5 in Hg,
the readout becomes yellow and a caution is issued.
AFCS
The propeller de-icing heater current (PROP HEAT AMPS) is displayed along a horizontal bar indicator with
a range from 0-30. If the propeller heat current is 0-13 or 19-30 a warning is issued.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 3-12 Systems Group
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FUEL QUANTITY
EICAS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel display shows the fuel quantity in each tank in gallons (gal). Fuel quantity for each tank is normally
shown along a vertical slider scale with corresponding readouts below each gauge. A total fuel quantity readout
is shown at the bottom of the display between the fuel quantity gauges. A caution or warning is issued for low
fuel quantity.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Tank Fuel
Quantities
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Total Fuel Quantity
Figure 3-13 Fuel Display
FLAP INDICATIONS
Flap positions are labeled 0°, 10°, 25°, and 40°. An invalid flap position is displayed as ‘--’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indication
Description
Flaps normal (EIS)
AFCS
Flaps normal (Engine
Page displayed)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid flap position (EIS)
APPENDICES
Invalid flap position
(Engine Page displayed)
INDEX
Table 3-1 Flap Indications
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LANDING GEAR INDICATIONS
Landing Gear statuses are shown using the indications in the following table.
EIS
Engine Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Position
Up &
Locked
EIS
In Transition
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Down and
Locked
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Warning
Table 3-2 Landing Gear Indications
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a PFD1, PFD2 or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary Mode
are configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for
information about display reversionary mode).
The Engine Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EICAS
EIS
EIS Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-14 Reversionary Mode (EIS Shown)
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the G1000 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
13
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and NRST Window
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME or DME Tuning Window – When the Becker ADF is installed the ADF/DME Tuning Window
displays ADF frequency, mode, and volume as well as DME frequency pairing mode. When the KR 87 ADF
is installed the DME Window is displayed, which only displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by
selecting the ADF/DME or DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto-tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large
knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted
cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
13
ADF/DME or DME Softkey – Displays the ADF/DME or DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
100
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker (if installed). COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in the P68.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
AFCS
Tuning Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
INDEX
APPENDICES
COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
EIS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window
Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-10, 4-11, and 4-12).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
EIS
Nearest Airports Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
Select INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
APPENDICES
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
VOLUME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, DME, or ADF Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard
over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFDs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ADF/DME TUNING (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME or DME Tuning Window is replaced on
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
the PFD.
If the KR 87 is installed the ADF is tuned on a separate control unit and DME tuning is performed in the DME
Tuning Window.
If the Becker ADF is the installed the G1000 system tunes the ADF receiver and DME transceiver. The ADF
is tuned by entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADF
Mode
ADF
Volume
APPENDICES
DME
Tuning
Mode
INDEX
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING (BECKER ADF ONLY)
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The G1000 System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
‘0000.0’.
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by pressing the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Volume
Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME or DME Tuning
Window. When the KR 87 is installed the the tuning window will show as DME Tuning and no ADF tuning
information will be displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
Figure 4-34 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
AFCS
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
APPENDICES
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STBY
XPDR
MSG
Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
MSG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-35 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
AFCS
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by selecting the GND Softkey.
APPENDICES
GND
Mode
Figure 4-36 Ground Mode
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
EIS
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-37 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-38 ON Mode
AFCS
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by selecting the ALT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
APPENDICES
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-40 Reply Indication
EIS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Selecting the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
AFCS
1) Select the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
INDEX
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by selecting the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is selected, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
EIS
VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is selected, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Select the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight
ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
If configuration is set to “SAME AS TAIL” the aircraft tail number will always be displayed.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry. The word “updating” appears until the new entry is completed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Flight ID
PFD Entry
Figure 4-45 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G1000.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker (if installed). Pressing the SPKR Key selects and
deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings
(autopilot, traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Volume can be adjusted though configuration.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-46 Speaker Key
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and a stereo music input for the pilot, copilot
and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios.
EIS
Figure 4-47 Intercom Controls
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot,
passengers,
music
Copilot,
passengers,
music
OFF
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers, music
Copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, passengers,
music
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers;
music
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Passenger Hears
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Table 4-48 ICS Isolation Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
APPENDICES
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
AFCS
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-49 Volume/Squelch Control
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is pressed on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
EIS
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-50 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
AFCS
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-51 Play Key
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPLIT COM OPERATION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-52 Split COM Operation
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks can be installed in
convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged
into the Music1 or Music2 jacks.
EIS
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
CREW MUSIC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Crew music (Music1) can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS
Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is
illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Music Muting
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Music Muting Enable/Disable
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
AFCS
PASSENGER MUSIC
Passenger music (Music2) can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
AFCS
Volume
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-53 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-54 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-55 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD FAILURE (REVERSIONARY MODE)
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 4-56 Display Backup Button
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
137
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G1000 are the full color displays: two Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/
VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are only
available with SBAS. L/VNAV will be flown as LNAV when SBAS is not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Map Range
Flight Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
INDEX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Box
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Direct-to
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
EIS
Description
Active Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD ->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Vector to Final
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Left DME Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Left Holding Pattern
Right DME Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Right Procedure Turn
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
AFCS
MFD Navigation Status Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Nav range ring
names
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other • Flight plan legs
pertinent information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
• Icons for enabled map features
• Obstacle data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
INDEX
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
AFCS
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range Overzoom
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-6 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
AFCS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
APPENDICES
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
INDEX
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
EIS
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map
Pointer
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
APPENDICES
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Information about
Point of Interest
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Map Pointer on POI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Information about
Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer on
Airspace
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAVAID
Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GO BACK Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
EIS
Airspace
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Measurement Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pointer Lat/Long
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
INDEX
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
EIS
TOPO Off
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO On
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
151
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Ground Elevation at Pointer
Location (only visible when
Pointer is displayed)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
APPENDICES
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2000
AFCS
2000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2000
EIS
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND DATA
On/Off
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AFCS
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Low Altitude Airways (or Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on
shorter routes and at lower altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground
level (AGL) and extend up to but not including 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are
designated with a “V” before the airway number (hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily
between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
INDEX
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAY Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed.
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only.
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only.
EIS
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
AFCS
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
EIS
TRACK VECTOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nav Range Ring On/Off
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind Vector On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
WIND VECTOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
AFCS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NAV RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range (radius)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
AFCS
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
INDEX
- System Setup Page.
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range to
Altitude Arc
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Waypoint Location
APPENDICES
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
AFCS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey
until INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list
of up to 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
AFCS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
Airport Information
EIS
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Airport
Nearest Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
EIS
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
INDEX
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Selected Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
AFCS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven Intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Intersection
EIS
Nearest Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Intersection Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
AFCS
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
Selected NDB
Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB
NDB Identifier/Type
EIS
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
AFCS
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:
APPENDICES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Nearest NDB
EIS
NDB Identifier/Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
AFCS
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EIS
Selected VOR
Navigation Map Showing Selected VOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
VOR Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
APPENDICES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Or:
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
EIS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
Nearest VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
VOR Frequency
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from an
existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been
created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.
Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint
EIS
Selected User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
User Waypoint List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
AFCS
Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint
Selected User Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
AFCS
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
b) Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
c) Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to ‘TEMPORARY’ or ‘NORMAL’ by moving the cursor to
‘TEMPORARY’ and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to ‘TEMPORARY’ or ‘NORMAL’ by moving the cursor to
‘TEMPORARY’ and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EIS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to ‘TEMPORARY’ or ‘NORMAL’ by moving the cursor to
‘TEMPORARY’ and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Enter a new name.
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TFR
Alert Area
AFCS
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-48 Airspaces
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace Alerts Box
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
APPENDICES
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
EIS
Airspace 1
Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
AFCS
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PFD MSG Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EIS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
AFCS
- Bearing/Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Desired Course
APPENDICES
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
INDEX
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
INDEX
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Page Menu
- Cancel Direct-To Navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
APPENDICES
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint,
or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior
to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to.
All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active non-heading Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading Leg not in the active flight segment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Anticipation Arc
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the loaded
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
EIS
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
Non-Active, Flight Plan Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active Flight Plan Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn Anticipation Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
APPENDICES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
EIS
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
AFCS
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Full Message
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Waypoint Sequence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Preview of Selected Airway
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
APPENDICES
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Exit Points
Available
Preview of
Selected Airway
AFCS
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
207
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Inserted Airway Header
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
AFCS
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
EIS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
- New Waypoint
- Load Departure
- Load Arrival
- Load Approach
- Activate Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
EIS
Departure Airport
Selected Departure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departures Available at
KMKC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of Selected
Departure
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Departure
Selected Runway
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Departure
Selected Departure End
Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
EIS
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Arrivals Available at KCOS
Selected Runway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
Selected Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approaches Available at
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Barometric Minimum
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the ‘APPROACH CHANNEL’ field.
INDEX
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Approach
Selected Transition
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Approach
Load Approach?
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAVGPS 35R LPV)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
AFCS
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
APPENDICES
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
AFCS
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows deletion of an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by
the G1000.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
APPENDICES
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
INDEX
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
AFCS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
221
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
AFCS
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting Parallel Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Original Track
Parallel Track Waypoints
AFCS
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight plan
from the current position on
(will not affect an approach)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Parallel Track
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt
EIS
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
AFCS
Active Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track
APPENDICES
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Destination
Waypoint
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
NARROW Softkey,
LEG-LEG Softkey,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIDE Softkey,
CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
EIS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to add the hold into the flight plan.
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
(TIME or DIST))
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-89 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Activate Hold
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
233
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint selection
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
INDEX
Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The G1000 supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Disabled (fields dashed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabled (valid data)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-92 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After VNV Direct-to
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
Figure 5-93 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
AFCS
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Large Cyan Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Cyan Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Altitude Constraint
Examples
APPENDICES
Small Cyan Subdued
Text
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-94 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Cyan Text
Cyan Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “not-designated”. This means the system will not
automatically use the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note
that these altitudes are displayed as white text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference
only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In
this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have not been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “designated” using the ENT
Key. The altitude can now be used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed altitudes may change due to recalculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
EIS
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Departure Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-95 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-96 Departure Loading
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available Procedure Actions
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-97 Arrival Selection
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-98 Arrival Loading
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
APPENDICES
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The G1000 SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Example on HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV
(available only if minima
SBAS available)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Figure 5-99 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-100 Approach Loading
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the small
FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach
is previewed on the map.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
EIS
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the TO/GA Switch.
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
AFCS
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
251
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-101 Temperature Compensation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-102 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
APPENDICES
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-103 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
INDEX
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitudes for the approach are cancelled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to Altitude Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-104 Course to Altitude
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
- Automatic/Manual
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
AFCS
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-105 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
APPENDICES
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to the
selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight
plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
INDEX
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 RAIM Prediction
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
AFCS
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
259
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-109 SBAS Display - Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-110 SBAS Display - Inactive
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-111 indicating the
active departure leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
2) Figure 5-111 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
INDEX
Figure 5-111 Assigned Heading of 240º
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-112.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-112 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-113. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-113 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-114.
INDEX
Figure 5-114 Entering V4 Entry Point
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-115.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-115 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-114, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-116.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-116 List of Available Airways for TOP
APPENDICES
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-116.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-117.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-117 List of Available Exits for V4
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-117.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-118.
Figure 5-118 Ready to Load V4
INDEX
k) Press the ENT Key.
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-119.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-119 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-120. Note the TOP to
ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.
AFCS
Figure 5-120 Comfirm Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-121, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-121 V4 Now Active Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-122.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-122 Turn on to Active Leg
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-123.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-123 Turn to Intercept V244
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) As seen in Figure 5-124, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-124 V244 Now Active Leg
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-125.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-125 HYS to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
c) Press the Direct-to (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-126.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-126 Direct To OPSHN
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-127.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-127 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-128.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-128 Enter VNV Offset Distance
INDEX
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-129, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
EIS
that will be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired
altitude, then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it will be used by the
system to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-129 Direct-to Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-130.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-130 Procedures Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-131.
Figure 5-131 List of Available Approaches
INDEX
APPENDICES
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-131.
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-132.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-132 List of Available Transitions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums (Figure 5-133)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-133 Barometric Minimums Set
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-134.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-134 Loaded Approach
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-135. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as white text, indicating these values are “not
designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the ENT Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
After making the altitude “designated”, it is displayed as cyan text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-135.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-135 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-136.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
Figure 5-136 Adjusting the Descent
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
15) As seen in Figure 5-137, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-137. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-138, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-137 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Target Altitude
AFCS
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-138 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-139.
Keep Vertical Deviation
Pointer Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-139 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-140.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
INDEX
Figure 5-140 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-141. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-141 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-142. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
Figure 5-142 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-143). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-143 Approaching PYNON
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-144).
Figure 5-144 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-145.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-145 Manually Activate Approach
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-146 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-147) when the final approach course becomes active.
Figure 5-147 Descending to the FAF
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-147.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-148.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-149.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INDEX
Figure 5-149 Missed Approach Active
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-150.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-150 Establishing the Holding Pattern
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-151.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-151 Hold Established
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-152. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-152. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-152.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, both TAWS and Terrain Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy
of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current
Track
Indicator
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Data Bar
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-152 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
INDEX
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
291
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the PA-34 provide situational awareness and advisory information with
regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
• GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar (Optional)
EIS
®
• L-3 Stormscope WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Standard with SVS Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Garmin GTS 825 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
EIS
The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. It provides SiriusXM Weather data to the
system. The Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map display the graphical
weather information and the associated text. The GDL 69A can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated by providing
SiriusXM the coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and SiriusXM
Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to activate the
weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
AFCS
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to provide weather data and/
or entertainment programming through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Contact SiriusXM by the customer service phone number listed on their website. Follow the instructions
provided by SiriusXM customer service.
2) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
APPENDICES
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.
5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
INDEX
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
EIS
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select to Display XM
Information page
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather data is the Map - Weather Data Link (XM) Page. This
is the only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather products. This
page also provides a menu to change the selected weather data link source, if more than one source has been
installed. The displayed weather products and softkeys correspond to the selected weather data link source.
Only weather products from one data link source can be displayed at a time.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page.
3) If the page title displays ‘MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT)’ and SiriusXM Weather is the desired data link
source, proceed to the next steps to change the weather data link source to SiriusXM Weather.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’ and press the ENT Key. Page title displays ‘MAP WEATHER DATA LINK (XM)’ to indicate SiriusXM Weather is the selected weather data link source.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages (US
& Canada)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
AFCS
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product.
The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather product,
which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed within the Broadcast Rate intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
INDEX
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
12
60
12
90
12
90
12
60
12
120
12
90
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
5
60
12
60
12
INDEX
30
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
30
AFCS
7.5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
No Radar Coverage
no product image
(RADAR CVRG)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
+
+
METARs
AFCS
+
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
EIS
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
+*
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
* Winds Aloft Data displayed inside Profile View on the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map. Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
AFCS
SFC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide the ability to enable/disable the display of weather products, equivalent to using the softkeys to
enable/disable the display of weather products.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired option to restore defaults (for all or for selection), and press the ENT Key.
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather products displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those
selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
If both SiriusXM Weather and GSR 56 Garmin Connext (CNXT) Weather services are installed, customizing
the display settings for the corresponding weather products shown in Table 6-3 will result in identical settings
for both services.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather Product
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Garmin Connext Weather Product
Precipitation
(PRECIP)
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-3 Corresponding SiriusXM Weather and Garmin Connext Weather Products
Each displayed weather product has an associated legend which can be shown on the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page. A legend is also available for weather products enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page):
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more SiriusXM Weather products are enabled for display).
INDEX
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional information about the following SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed by panning the map
pointer over the displayed products on the map:
• AIRMETs
• Cloud Tops
• METARs
• Cell Movement
• County Warnings
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Echo Tops
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Severe
Thunderstorm
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence, or icing data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
is displayed.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
INDEX
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
The weather product displays composite information from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States.
This information is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display
of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be
viewed on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND
Softkey when NEXRAD is enabled for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in a gray shade of purple (Figure 6-11).
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block Area is 4 km2
at 30 NM map
range
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
APPENDICES
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation, regardless of
actual precipitation type.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Echo Tops data cannot be displayed simultaneously with Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data.
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple (Figure 6-15).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected
for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
NOTE: The SiriusXM Lightning weather product cannot be displayed on the same map simultaneously with
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
optional WX-500 Stormscope® lightning data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-18 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the SiriusXM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-19), press the
LEGEND Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-19 SiriusXM Lightning Legend
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL MOVEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Storm Cells
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Weather Product
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement information appears with the NEXRAD weather product. On the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently.
Displaying Cell Movement information:
AFCS
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be enabled in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page”
procedure).
APPENDICES
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-21), press the
LEGEND Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The National Weather Service (NWS) issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and
AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The NWS issues a
Convective SIGMET for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
EIS
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Convective
SIGMET
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
312
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report. A
colored flag indicates an airport with an available METAR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in
a decoded fashion, then in its original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
present in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note the METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Symbol
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
The original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map
page. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MFD. A solid METAR flag next to a waypoint indicates METAR observations are available corresponding to
a specific waypoint in the flight plan; a hollow METAR flag indicates an off-route METAR near the flight plan
waypoint is available. If METAR text for an off-route waypoint is displayed, the system also provides the
source, distance, and direction of the off-route METAR reporting station in relation to the flight plan waypoint
at the end of the report.
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appears in
the Selected Waypoint Weather Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the LEGEND Softkey when
METARs are selected for display.
The content of the METAR determines the METAR flag color. The METAR flag is gray when the METAR
text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
service area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
AFCS
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
the Surface Analysis and City Forecast are enabled for display.
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREEZING LEVELS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). If the system has not received data for a given altitude, or the information
is out-of-date, the system does not display information for that altitude.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data
is selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-32) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the
surface and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be chosen in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to
42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
APPENDICES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-4.
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind
Symbol
AFCS
5 knots
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
Table 6-4 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
APPENDICES
Enabling/disabling profile view (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County Warning weather product (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
EIS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flood
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-38 County Flood Warning
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms, and
their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of DD/HH:MM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-40 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-42) shows a graphical view of the icing environment. Icing
severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The
CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying the Icing weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
INDEX
Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-44) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather product.
Displaying Turbulence data:
EIS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-44 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-46) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots.
When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required
to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing
conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
A similar type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Routine
PIREP
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-46 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not shown
in the decoded PIREP or AIREP.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
325
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Raw PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-47 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas
where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security,
law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and
TFR data displayed on the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from official
sources including Flight Service Stations (FSS), and Air Traffic Control facilities.
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TFR Summary
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-49 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
INFORMATION window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the INFORMATION window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-53).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, maximum map range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIRIUSXM WEATHER ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM services
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-54 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message
Message Location
XM Information Page - Data Signal
Strength field
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page - Data Signal
Strength field
NONE
EIS
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
of page
NO SIGNAL
DETECTING ACTIVATION
WAITING FOR DATA...
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Description
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
System is activating SiriusXM subscription(s).
SiriusXM Weather subscription confirmed.
Downloading weather data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext weather products varies by region and is subject to
EIS
change. For weather product coverage information, refer to fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather. This
Pilot’s Guide shows all Garmin Connext weather products, regardless of product availability in a specific
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite transceiver provides Garmin Connext Weather reception capabilities to
the system. Graphical weather information and its associated text are displayed on the Multi Function Display
(MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The system provides weather information after the pilot initiates either a manual or automatic Connext Data
Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin Connext weather requires an active Iridium satellite network account and a subscription to the Garmin
Connext Weather service.
REGISTERING THE IRIDIUM SATELLITE SYSTEM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A subscriber account must be established for the Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium Satellite System
for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver
(GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 6-55. Contact Garmin
at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
Figure 6-55 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
REGISTERING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the system in
order to complete the registration process.
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
MAP page group.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT or XM) Page. If ‘XM’ is displayed in
the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link source to CNXT before continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing
the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change the data link source to prior to registration.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If the system displays the ‘CONNEXT REGISTRATION’ window, proceed to step 6. Otherwise, press the MENU
Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 6-56.
Figure 6-56 Select Register With Connext
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in Figure 6-57.
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-57 Enter Access Code
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin Flight Data Services in the ‘ACCESS CODE’ field.
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘REGISTER’ is highlighted as in Figure 6-57.
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System registration is complete
when ‘REGISTERED’ appears in the STATUS field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ACCESSING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
APPENDICES
The principal map for viewing Garmin Connext weather information is the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page in the Map Page Group (Figure 6-58). This is the only map display capable of showing information for
all available Garmin Connext weather products. This page is also used to select a weather data link source, if
more than one source (such as SiriusXM Weather) has also been installed. The displayed weather products and
softkeys correspond to the selected weather data link source. No weather information is displayed until the
first Connext Data Request is made.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
INDEX
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT or XM) Page.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) If the page title displays ‘MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM)’ and Garmin Connext (CNXT) data is desired,
proceed to the next step to change the weather data link source to Garmin Connext
4) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display Connext Weather’ and press the ENT Key. Page title displays ‘MAP WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT)’ to indicate Garmin Connext is the selected weather data link source.
Only one weather data link source may be selected for display at a time. If Garmin Connext is selected,
optional SiriusXM Weather data (and corresponding softkeys) are removed.
EIS
Weather Product
Age Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precip Weather
Product Display
Enabled icon
Figure 6-58 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
(After Connext Data Request)
AFCS
Precip Weather
Product Enabled
for Display
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
APPENDICES
For each enabled Garmin Connext weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product
age. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather
product. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather
product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
INDEX
Weather products are updated continuously or refreshed at specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate
column in Table 6-6). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals (see
Table 6-6), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product age.
If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age changes to yellow. If data for
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather product symbol instead of the
product age.
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Symbol
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
90
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
AFCS
30
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
60
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
EIS
Radar Precipitation
(PRECIP)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-6 shows the Garmin Connext weather product symbols, the expiration times, and the refresh rates.
The refresh rate represents the interval at which the Garmin Connext ground-based servers make available the
most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which new content is received
from various weather sources.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take
between 3 and 10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-6 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+*
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
PIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
* Winds Aloft Data displayed inside Profile View on the Navigation Map Page.
+
+
Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG)
METARs
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
Precipitation (PRECIP)
Navigation Map Page
EIS
Garmin Connext Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-7 shows which Garmin Connext weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on
specific maps.
Table 6-7 Garmin Connext Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure
6-59 shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page). When a weather product
is selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product display is
enabled.
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
IR SAT
DL LTNG
SIG/AIR
WIND OFF
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PRECIP
ENGINE
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-59 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Weather Product Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page control the map
range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The
menus also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-61).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
337
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-60 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Figure 6-61 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If both Garmin Connext and SiriusXM Weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the
corresponding weather products shown in Table 6-8 will result in identical settings for both services.
SiriusXM Weather Product
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Garmin Connext Weather Product
Precipitation
(PRECIP)
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
INDEX
Table 6-8 Corresponding SiriusXM Weather and Garmin Connext Weather Products
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Restoring default Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
EIS
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-62).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-63).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-64).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
INDEX
Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-64 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page. If no weather product softkeys are selected, the LEGEND Softkey will be unavailable.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (Weather Data Link (CNXT)) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the Connext Weather Legends Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press
the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey.
4) To remove the Connext Weather Legends Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press
the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a Garmin Connext weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the system can
display the weather product information box (with the weather product icon and age) on the PFD Inset Map.
Viewing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey. The system displays the weather product information box when Garmin Connext
weather products are displayed on the PFD Inset Map.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-65 Panning on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Connext Data Request Window provides the flight crew with the options to enable or disable the
requested weather coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to
send or cancel weather data requests. The status of the Garmin Connext data request process is also displayed.
AFCS
Before a Garmin Connext data request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which
all currently available Garmin Connext weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field) must
be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window will indicate ‘INVALID COVERAGE
AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Requesting Garmin Connext weather manually:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-66).
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to check or uncheck
one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-67, 6-68):
INDEX
• PRESENT POSITION – Requests data based on current location.
• DESTINATION – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired
flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘REMAINING FPL’ to request the remainder of the flight
plan), then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘SEND REQ’ button is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘DIAMETER / RTE WIDTH’ (diameter/route width) distance field and
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
EIS
• WAYPOINT – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Figure 6-66 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-67 Connext Data Request Window
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Figure 6-68 Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation and Infrared Satellite Displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once
a connection is established, the window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with an estimated
data transfer time (either in minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request window may be closed
while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue to process in the
background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete depending on the size
of the selected weather coverage area(s), the amount of weather activity present (such as precipitation), and the
Iridium signal strength.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext weather products within the selected coverage area(s)
during an initial Connext Data Request. Enabling or disabling the display of the weather product does not affect
which weather products are retrieved during a Connext Data Request.
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To reduce data usage during subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual weather
products such as METARs and TAFs, so long as they have not expired. The system also retrieves any new
textual weather products matching the current coverage area, and all graphical weather products during each
data request.
If the Connext Data Request is unsuccessful, refer to the Abnormal Operations discussion later in this section
for more information on the messages received, with possible causes.
Cancelling Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL REQ’ and press the ENT Key. The REQUEST STATUS window
indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The pilot can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Auto requests remain enabled until the
pilot disables them, or the system power is cycled. When an automatic data request is enabled, the REQUEST
STATUS window will display a countdown timer until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request window and its associated options will not be available.
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘UPDATE RATE’ setting. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (OFF, or number of minutes), then press the ENT Key.
6) The ‘SEND REQ” button is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘REQUEST STATUS’ based
on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext Data
Request.
APPENDICES
Or:
INDEX
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
PRECIPITATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically,
the Garmin Connext service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns a
single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Boundary of
Precipitation Data
Request
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Radar Coverage
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-69 Precipitation Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
APPENDICES
Precipitation data can be displayed on the following maps:
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
• Airport Information Page
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Precipitation information shown represents highest level, composite reflectivity, of radar returns. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends
can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation legend (Figure 6-70), press the
LEGEND Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
No Radar Coverage
Boundary of weather
data request
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-70 Precipitation Weather
Product Legend
AFCS
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where radar
coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of purple. A white
tick-marked boundary line depicts the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request. This boundary
encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
APPENDICES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• The radar beam may overshoot precipitation occurring below the lowest antenna beam tilt angle (0.5°),
causing no precipitation to be displayed. An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at
close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the radar site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Block represents
4 km2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-71 Precipitation Data - Zoomed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
APPENDICES
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
INFRARED SATELLITE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product (Figure 6-72) depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite
imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-72 Infrared Satellite Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Infrared Satellite legend (Figure 6-73), press the LEGEND Softkey when Infrared Satellite data
is selected for display.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-73 Infrared Satellite Legend
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT DATA LINK LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) weather product (Figure 6-74) shows the approximate
location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a twokilometer region. Neither cloud-to-cloud nor the exact location of the lightning strike is displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning Strikes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-74 Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning
Displaying Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the DL LTNG Softkey.
To display the Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure
6-75), select the LEGEND Softkey when the product is selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-75 Garmin Connext Data
Link Lightning Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown as long as any portion of it is issued within the selected coverage
area of the Connext Data Request.
EIS
Instructions for Viewing
SIGMET/AIRMET Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET
Figure 6-76 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
AFCS
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-77 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-78), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-77 Sample SIGMET Text
350
Figure 6-78 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
EIS
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-79 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
The system displays METAR and TAF text on the Weather Information Page. METAR information appears
first in a decoded fashion, followed by the original METAR text. Note the original text may contain additional
information not found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form at
airports with an available TAF.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note the METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Symbol
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-80 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Orignal METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR flag is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MFD. A solid METAR flag next to a waypoint indicates METAR observations are available corresponding to
a specific waypoint in the flight plan; a hollow METAR flag indicates an off-route METAR near the flight plan
waypoint is available. If METAR text for an off-route waypoint is displayed, the system also provides the
source, distance, and direction of the off-route METAR reporting station in relation to the flight plan waypoint
at the end of the report.
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, press the LEGEND Softkey when
METARs are selected for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The METAR flag is gray when
the METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-81 METAR Legend
WINDS ALOFT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-82) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the
surface and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to
42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
353
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-82 Winds Aloft at 3,000 Feet
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-83), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
Figure 6-83 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-84). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-9.
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind
Symbol
5 knots
AFCS
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
Table 6-9 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
APPENDICES
Enabling/disabling profile view (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-85).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-86).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-87).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-87 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
PIREP
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-88 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP text is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note
the original text may contain additional information not shown in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
357
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Decoded PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Raw PIREP Text
Figure 6-89 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-90), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs are selected for
display. The PIREP color is determined by the report type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-90 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
TFRS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data from Garmin Connext is only available in the United States
(not including any U.S. territories.) Refer to fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather for product coverage
information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
INDEX
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including
national security, law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued
at any time, and TFR data displayed is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Summary
Information
EIS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-91 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page or Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
AFCS
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window (Figure 6-92).
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-92 Full Text for Selected TFR
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-94).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-95).
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-95 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the request status
window.
The Iridium or Connext systems are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. If this error
persists, the system should be serviced.
A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
There is a problem with the Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United
States or 913-440-1135 for assistance.
The Connext weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to service in
less than 30 minutes.
The Connext weather data server is expected to be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a waypoint,
a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is enabled
(checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext weather from Connext, or the access
code is incorrect. Verify the access code. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States
or 913-440-1135 for assistance.
The Garmin Connext Data request area exceeds size limits. Reduce weather coverage area and
re-send data request.
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request..
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Request Cancelled
Request Failed - Try
Again
This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or a GIA is off-line.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reduce Request Area
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A communications error has occurred with the GIA. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Connext
Subscription
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Connext Server
Temporarily Inop
Connext Server Inop
Invalid Coverage Area
Description
EIS
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request
to reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error
[2]
Connext Comm Error
[4]
Connext Comm Error
[5]
Connext Comm Error
[6]
Connext Comm Error
[7]
Connext Comm Error
[8]
Connext Login Invalid
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Request
Status Message
Table 6-10 Abnormal Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Status Messages
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD Inset map will be available for display (see Table 6-7 for a list of weather products and their
associated map availability).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If manual weather data requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new Connext
Data Requests can be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic weather data requests
were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in
Reversionary Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5 kilowatts
of output power. It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high-definition target
display. The pulse width is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges except the 2.5 nm range. The GWX 68 uses a
one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the targets smearing together on the display for better target definition
at close range.
EIS
The PA-34 uses a 10-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º of pitch and roll.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup
activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range cell
activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation (or
large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being monitored.
PRINCIPLES OF PULSED AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
AFCS
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the
center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and
receiving. The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if a target is ten nautical miles away.
APPENDICES
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The
decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft
capabilities, and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence.
The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly
between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence.
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD AND AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values used by Garmin Airborne Color Weather Radar should not be confused with
NEXRAD radar values.
EIS
ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts a radar
beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the same holds
true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible to
miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set
to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10°
0
0
15
Half Power at
es
Beam Sidelob
Max Power at Beam Center
18,000 ft.
30
45
60
75
90
AFCS
Range (nautical miles)
Figure 6-96 Radar Beam from a 10 inch Antenna
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
INDEX
320 nm
Figure 6-97 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar
transmits the signal, the signal is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This
weakening, or attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
Radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected
radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from
an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as
the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within the GWX 68 system compensates for much of this
distance attenuation.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH® feature of the GWX 68 Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount of
wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY
Precipitation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather radar detects precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth
or solid structures. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence directly.
It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar signal
reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
are often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog
or drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
365
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-98 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the ground
target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. By adjusting the gain, shorelines,
rivers, lakes, and cities appear well-defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill in
between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Returns
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
AFCS
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
APPENDICES
Angle of Incidence
INDEX
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-99 Angle of Incidence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)
AFCS
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 9.16 feet from the 10-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MPEL
Boundary
APPENDICES
9.16’ for 10” antenna
INDEX
Figure 6-100 MPEL Boundary
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
EIS
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within 5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This places the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
4000
Change in Antenna Tilt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
APPENDICES
3000
10 nm
4000
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
AFCS
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.
INDEX
Figure 6-101 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. If that ground target
return moves to 5 nm, maximum distance below the aircraft is 2,000 feet.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 68. There are many other factors to
consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Magenta
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
50 dBZ and greater
Approximate
Precipitation Rate
(in/hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
>2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Intensity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Mode Color
EIS
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in the table.
Table 6-11 Precipitation Intensity Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Thunderstorms
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
AFCS
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation.
Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
APPENDICES
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Squall Line
EIS
Steep Gradient
Hook or Finger
Scalloped Edge
Figure 6-102 Cell Irregularities
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
Figure 6-103 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
INDEX
The Blind Alley at Close Range
The Large Storm Behind
Figure 6-104 The Blind Alley
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (numeral 9 i the southern hemisphere),
especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern
hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
EIS
• Doughnut shapes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
Hail
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ground, no personnel or objects should be within 9.16 feet of the antenna.
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
EIS
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system automatically switches to Standby mode. The system
remains in Standby mode until both displays are restored. In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system
cannot be controlled.
Scan Line
Antenna Stabilization Status
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-105 Horizontal Scan Display
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the MODE Softkey.
3) While on the ground, press the STANDBY Softkey. A one-minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown is
displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby Mode.
Press the WEATHER Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
a)
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-106 Confirming Activating Radar
EIS
b)
Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the aircraft is airborne, press the WEATHER Softkey. A one-minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown
is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
4) Turn the RANGE Knob to select the desired map range.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed (Figure 6-105). If desired, press the VERTICAL Softkey to change to
vertical scanning.
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the BEARING field and
displays the Bearing Line.
AFCS
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Bearing
Line. Press the ENT Key.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.
Bearing Line
APPENDICES
Scan Line
INDEX
Figure 6-107 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Press the VERTICAL Softkey. A vertical slice of the selected area is displayed (Figure 6-108).
5) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned slice a few degrees right or left.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the RANGE Knob to adjust the range.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, press the HORIZON Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan view
and repeat the previous steps.
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust bearing from left to right.
EIS
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-108 Vertical Scan Display
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the TILT field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
1) Press the TILT Softkey to activate the cursor in the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Tilt Line. Press
the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is again selected.
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt.
Tilt Line
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Scan Line
Figure 6-109 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Adjusting Gain:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) Press the GAIN Softkey to activate the cursor in the GAIN field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the GAIN field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the GAIN Softkey again to recalibrate the gain. CALIBRATED is displayed in the GAIN field.
AFCS
Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated
Calibrated Gain
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-110 Gain Calibration
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Sector Scan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While in horizontal scan mode, press the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
BEARING field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
2) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-111 Selecting Sector Scan Position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select FULL, 60˚, 40˚, or 20˚ scan.
AFCS
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
7) Press the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference resets to 0º.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-112 40˚ Sector Scan
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Antenna Stabilization
1) To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, press the MODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the STAB ON Softkey to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF Softkey to deactivate. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display.
WATCH® (Weather Attenuated Color Highlight)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
WATCH® identifies deceptively strong or unknown intensity parts of a storm. While in horizontal
scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed
intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy
weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance.
Issues with the radome also attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the return
intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the
displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions with
this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent
of attenuation in a shaded area.
To activate or deactivate the WATCH® feature, press the WATCH Softkey.
Areas of
Attenuated Signal
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed intensity is questionable.
Potentially stronger than displayed.
Horizontal Scan Without WATCH®
Horizontal Scan With WATCH®
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-113 Horizontal Scan Without and With WATCH®
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Alert and WX Alert Message Advisory
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
In addition, if the system detects a Weather Alert within ±10° of the aircraft heading, and the WX ALERT
Softkey is enabled, a WX ALERT Message Advisory appears on the PFD in the Messages Window.
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by ground returns. To avoid
unwanted weather alerts, deselect the WX ALRT Softkey.
EIS
Weather Alerts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-114 Weather Alert Indications
AFCS
To activate or deactivate WX ALERT Message Advisory, press the WX ALRT Softkey on the Weather
Radar Page. The system continues to display the detected Weather Alert targets on the Weather Radar Page
regardless of WX ALRT Softkey selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-115 Weather Alert
Message Advisory on the PFD
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.
EIS
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of the
GAIN and TILT controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground Map
Mode Color
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Yellow
Black
Cyan
Magenta
Blue
Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
27 dB and greater
Table 6-12 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) Press the MODE Softkey.
2) Press the GROUND Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
3) Press the BACK Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
The radar mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Page. Additional information
may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Page as a banner annunciation.
Standby
STANDBY
STANDBY
Standby (During Warm-Up)
STANDBY
WARM-UP
XX
(XX indicates number of seconds
remaining in warm-up)
Weather
WEATHER
None
Ground Mapping
Off
Radar Failed*
GROUND MAPPING
OFF
FAIL
None
OFF
RADAR FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Center Banner Annunciation
EIS
Radar Mode Annunciation Box
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-14 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-13 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system displays the status of the radar antenna stabilization feature in the upper right corner of the
Weather Radar Page.
AFCS
Radar Antenna
Description
Stabilization Status
STAB ON
Antenna stabilization is selected on.
STAB OFF
Antenna stabilization is selected off.
The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information. The antenna
STAB INOP
stabilization feature is inoperative.
Table 6-14 Antenna Stabilization Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center of the Weather
Radar Page.
APPENDICES
Weather Radar
Page Center Banner
Description
Annunciation
BAD CONFIG
The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT
The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
RADAR FAIL
The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
Table 6-15 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map with data link lightning
EIS
weather products.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages,
press the MAP Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-16.
AFCS
Table 6-16 Lightning Age and Symbols
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-116), press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’),
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-118).
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following options are available (Figure 6-116):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-116 Navigation Map
Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-117 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-118). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-118 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
INDEX
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-119).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-119 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 30 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present.
The maximum zoom range can also be set on the Navigation Map.
AFCS
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal map page for viewing Stormscope lightning data. Stormscope
lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
AFCS
Figure 6-120 Stormscope Page
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
INDEX
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
386
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
G1000 Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B). TAWS-B
is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning
annunciations or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are
within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the
same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-121 and Table 6-17 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-121 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-17 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
AFCS
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for viewing Terrain Proximity information.
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
APPENDICES
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-125).
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
INDEX
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-122).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-123).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-124).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-122 Navigation Map Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
Figure 6-124 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu, Map Group
INDEX
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning the RANGE
Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-125 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s
current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can
be displayed for reference.
AFCS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or
arcs).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
APPENDICES
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Range Rings
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-126 Terrain Proximity Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
APPENDICES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Figure 6-127 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.6 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide TAWS-B terrain or obstacle caution or
warning annunciations or voice alerts systems, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View.
The colors and symbols in Figure 6-128 and Table 6-18 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
EIS
100 ft Threshold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-128 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View Terrain
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-18 Profile View Obstacle Colors and Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Accessing Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
INDEX
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
EIS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the RANGE Knob, the horizontal distance of the Profile
View is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or TAWS-B
discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Profile
View Path
Enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Range
Terrain Legend
Terrain Enabled Icons
Altitude Scale
AFCS
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-129 Navigation Map Page with Profile View Terrain and Topographic
Data Enabled
APPENDICES
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated on the HSI,
and is widest during enroute or oceanic phases (Table 6-19).
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase Total Profile View Width
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
EIS
Table 6-19 Profile View Width Scale
PROFILE PATH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown as a
white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when Profile View is enabled. White range
markers on both edges of the Profile Path rectangle correspond to the range markers along the distance scale
inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or 7.5 km if configured
for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-130).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-131).
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-132).
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum range at which Profile Path
is shown
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-130 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-131 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-132 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.7 TERRAIN-SVS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
EIS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option. The TAWS-B option will
to enhance situational awareness.
area.
take precedence over Terrain-SVS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system included with the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option.. The
optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain relevant to the projected
flight path. For detailed information regarding SVT, refer to the Flight Instruments section of this Pilot’s Guide.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with TAWS-B. TAWS-B is more
sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays
are the same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
• Descent to 500 Feet Callout (DFC)
AFCS
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
APPENDICES
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
INDEX
The system’s GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
EIS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater
than 200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-133 and Tables 6-20 and 6-21 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-133 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-20 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
APPENDICES
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Warning
Caution
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Table 6-21 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Terrain-SVS Page (Figures 6-137 and 6-138) is the principal map page for viewing Terrain-SVS
information. Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Terrain-SVS Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
EIS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon is shown to indicate that the
feature is enabled for display. A legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation
Map Page (Figure 6-140) and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the Terrain-SVS Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the Terrain-SVS Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
AFCS
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-134).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-135).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-136).
APPENDICES
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-134 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-135 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-136 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain-SVS Page (Figures 6-137 and 6-138) is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports,
VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of
the aircraft intersect, the system automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest
potential impact point on the Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading-up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
APPENDICES
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-137 Terrain-SVS Page
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
INDEX
Figure 6-138 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an
alert is issued, visual annunciations appear with voice alerts. Table 6-22 shows Terrain-SVS alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
Terrain-SVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up
alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pop-up
Alert
Figure 6-139 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-140 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-22 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the projected flight path
as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The
system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
INDEX
APPENDICES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
600
500
400
300
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
200
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
Figure 6-141 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When
Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD terrain
annunciation window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-142 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
AFCS
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
While Terrain-SVS alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
INDEX
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, Terrain-SVS conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. A voice alert occurs when
the test has completed.
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the system issues the “Terrain System Available” voice alert.
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVS operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
Aural Message
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-23 Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.8 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
situational awareness.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) is an optional software feature that provides audio
and visual warning messages to alert the flight crew of potential conflicts between the current flight path and
surrounding terrain and obstacles. The TAWS-B messages are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information from by government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data, per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information
should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate.
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-143 and Tables 6-24 and 6-25 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-143 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-24 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
APPENDICES
Warning
Caution
INDEX
Table 6-25 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Map - TAWS-B Page (Figures 6-148 and 6-149) on the MFD is the principal map page for viewing
TAWS-B information. TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
• TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
EIS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon is shown to indicate that the feature
is enabled for display. A legend for TAWS-B terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-144) and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-144 Terrain Icon and Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
AFCS
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the TAWS-B Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-145).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-146).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-147).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
EIS
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-145 Navigation Map Page
Menu
Figure 6-147 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-146 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs)
can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the system
automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest potential impact point on the
TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
EIS
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-148 TAWS-B Page
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
INDEX
Figure 6-149 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and the system issues a voice alert. Table 6-26 shows TAWS-B alert
types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
TAWS-B Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up
alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pop-up
Alert
Figure 6-150 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-151 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
*
EIS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
*
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-26 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-152 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-152 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-153. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-153.
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
800
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-153 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-154).
AFCS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
INDEX
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-154 PDA Alerting Threshold
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The pilot can inhibit PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting these alerts, as they should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are manually
inhibited, the system displays the a ‘TAWS INH’ annunciation on the PFD and in the TAWS-B annunciation
window of the MFD (Figure 6-155).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-155 TAWS-B Alerting Inhibited
Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
While TAWS-B alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
APPENDICES
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the voice alert “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft descends
to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an airport, the
“Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more
than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain. There
are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany this voice alert.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
Figures 6-156 and 6-157 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b for altitude loss
and climb rate respectively.
1000
AFCS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-156 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1000
800
700
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
EIS
200
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-157 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can also be manually
initiated. A voice alert occurs at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-158).
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-158 TAWS-B Page Menu
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ annunciation.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system displays
the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS signal integrity
returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the “TAWS Available” voice
alert.
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in progress
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
EIS
No GPS position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
None
Aural Message
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-27 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.9 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
TIS Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown in Table 6-28.
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-28 TIS Traffic Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-163) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on
which traffic can be displayed (Figure 6-159).
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
AFCS
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Non-Bearing
Traffic Advisory
APPENDICES
Figure 6-159 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-160).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-161).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-162).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-160 Navigation Map Page Menu
INDEX
Figure 6-161 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Figure 6-162 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated
by the map range rings.
EIS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
AFCS
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
APPENDICES
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
INDEX
Figure 6-163 Traffic Map Page
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
EIS
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-164 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AFCS
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
APPENDICES
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
SYSTEM STATUS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
FAILED
The transponder has failed*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
UNAVAILABLE
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-29 TIS Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TIS System Failed
INDEX
APPENDICES
No Data Received
from Transponder
Figure 6-165 TIS Power-up Test Failure
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Failed*
FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
TIS Standby
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
* See Table 6-31 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-30 TIS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-31).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AGE MM:SS
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-31 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.10 GTS 825 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: TIS is disabled when TAS installed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Garmin GTS 825 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual and voice
traffic alerts to assist the pilot in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 825 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders, and
up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest
threat potential can be displayed simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating
transponders.
AFCS
THEORY OF OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the GTS 825 is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and
if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The GTS 825 then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the system displays visual annunciations and provides
voice alerts.
APPENDICES
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The GTS 825 TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under
ideal conditions, the system scans transponder traffic up to 40 nm in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II)
systems are detected, the GTS 825 automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore
range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the traffic system detects airborne
traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) information, the system
will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in Table 6-33.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic information
from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the TAS surveillance volume.
This system is limited to displaying ADS-B information from suitably equipped airborne aircraft within the
TAS surveillance volume.
EIS
TAS Symbol
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory (PA)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Traffic Advisory (TA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-32 TAS Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
AFCS
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy
is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Table 6-33 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
INDEX
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm
that is neither a TA or PA.
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information,
but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet (Figure 6-166). When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a
minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol (Figure 6-166) indicates climbing or descending
traffic (at least 500 feet per minute) with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
Relative Altitude
EIS
Vertical trend arrow
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-166 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track (Figure 6-167).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-167 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
Flight IDs may also be displayed with traffic symbols; see the Flight IDs discussion in this section for more
information.
AFCS
On-ground aircraft with Mode S transponders are not displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system applies Level A TA sensitivity when the
landing gear is extended and/or the groundspeed is less than 120 knots; Level B TA sensitivity applies in all
other conditions.
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
AFCS
Table 6-34 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: In retractable-gear installations, traffic voice alerts do not occur when the landing gear is extended.
Only visual traffic annunciations appear when the landing gear is extended.
When the GTS 825 detects a new TA, the following occur:
APPENDICES
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-35). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
INDEX
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-168).
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-168 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Bearing
Table 6-35 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
AFCS
SYSTEM TEST
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
test during flight.
APPENDICES
The GTS 825 provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-169). If the system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test Passed”
Otherwise the system announces, “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the traffic
system enters Standby Mode.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) Press the TEST Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key.
Test Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-169 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
OPERATION
NOTE: The GTS 825 automatically changes from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after takeoff.
APPENDICES
The unit also automatically changes from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
After power-up, the GTS 825 is in Standby Mode. The GTS 825 must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be
displayed and for TAs to be issued.
INDEX
Selecting the OPERATE Softkey allows the traffic unit to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Selecting the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the OPERATE Softkey
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic unit switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B Directional
Information, 500’ Below, Climbing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Non-Threat Traffic,
2500’ Above,
Descending
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Climbing
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level, Flight ID
Displayed
AFCS
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
1000’ Above,
Level
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
APPENDICES
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-170 Traffic Map Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic mode
field.
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
EIS
Altitude Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight ID Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-171). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-171 Traffic Map Page with Flight ID Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-172).
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-172 Traffic Map Page Menu
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Trip Planning Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
AFCS
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Figure 6-173).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the traffic system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-173.
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Proximity
Traffic, 900’
Above, Level
EIS
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Status
Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Banner Annunciation
Figure 6-173 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-174).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-175).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-176).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
AFCS
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
437
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-174 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-175 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-176 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional data link weather information.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
EIS
TAS Standby
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* See Table 6-37 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-36 TAS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
DATA FAILED
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-37 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
APPENDICES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA OFF SCALE
Description
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-38 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
439
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The digital Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is fully integrated within the G1000 System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
AFCS functionality in the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units
(LRUs):
• GSA 80 AFCS Servos (3) (4 with Yaw Damper)
• GDU 1044/1045 Multi-Function Display (MFD) (1)
• GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes (4)
EIS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) (2)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAUs) (2)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — The Piper PA-34-220T Seneca flight director commands are displayed on both PFDs.
The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos and yaw trim
adapter. It also provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering
commands, Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination
in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
AFCS
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim capability
when the autopilot is not engaged.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section provides an overview for autopilot engagement and disengagement. A more detailed description
follows in the Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation section.
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFD.
EIS
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will be
annunciated.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight directore modes remain unchanged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC Switch, which is located on each control wheel. An autopilot disconnect tone will be heard and
annunciated on the PFD. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
– Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Operating the MEPT Switch (located on the each control wheel)
– Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC Switch will disconnect the
autopilot and remove all power to the servos.
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.2 AFCS CONTROLS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezels of the MFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP Key
FD Key
3
9
4
10
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
EIS
Engages/disengages the autopilot
2
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 YD Key
If installed, engages/disengages the yaw damper
8 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
9 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
10 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
11 NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
11
6
APPENDICES
Figure 7-1 Dedicated AFCS Controls
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
EIS
CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director and interrupts pitch trim
operation
An AP DISC Switch is located on each control wheel.
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if
not in a Vertical Navigation, Glideslope, or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A CWS Button is located on each control wheel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TO/GA Switch
(Go Around)
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new pitch and roll
references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The TO/GA Switch is located on the throttle.
MEPT Switch
Used to command manual electric pitch trim. An MEPT Switch is located on each
(Manual Electric control wheel.
Pitch Trim)
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Pushing the MEPT ARM Switch disengages the autopilot, if currently engaged, but
does not affect yaw damper operation. The MEPT ARM Switch may be used to
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
INDEX
APPENDICES
LVL Button
Level Mode
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated
simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than three
seconds, MEPT function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFDs. The function remains disabled until both sides of the
switch are inactivated.
The LVL Button engages the autopilot in Level Mode for pitch and roll.
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFDs.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Modes Selected
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
AFCS
Navigation**
TO/GA Switch
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Key
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the pilot-side flight
director in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the
displays by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS STATUS BOX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in
white and active in green.
Vertical Modes
EIS
Lateral Modes
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
Armed
Active
Flight Director Active
Indicator Arrow
Mode
Reference
Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status Box
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
Vertical
Speed
Reference
AFCS
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
EIS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as a single-cue.
The Command Bars do not override the (yellow) Aircraft Symbol. The single-cue Command Bars (Figure 7-4)
move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
AFCS
Command Bars
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-4 Single-cue Command Bars
APPENDICES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 VERTICAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values
for each of these references using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.
EIS
Vertical Mode
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pitch Hold
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold
Vertical Path Tracking
VNV Target Altitude Capture
AFCS
Glidepath
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Glideslope
Takeoff
APPENDICES
Go Around
Level
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Captures and tracks descent legs of
an active vertical profile
Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the WAAS
glidepath on approach
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
on approach
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on the ground in
preparation for takeoff
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level in the air
Commands a zero degree pitch angle
and wings level
Reference
Range
Reference
Change
Increment
-15° to
+20°
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
80 to
204 kts
1 kt
Control Annunciation
(default)
PIT
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
VNV
Key
VPTH
**
ALTV
APR
Key
TO/GA
Switch
LVL
Button
GP
GS
TO
10°
GA
7°
LVL
Pitch angle
to maintain
0 fpm VS
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
INDEX
** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
EIS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the CWS
Button
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for
example). The ALT Knob on the MFD is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until
Selected Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT Knob on the MFD to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
active causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for
the new Selected Altitude.
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the CWS
Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
Altitude
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Bug
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Reference
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
INDEX
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the Airspeed
Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When Flight Level
Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Airspeed
Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to the
desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director maintains
the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not allow the aircraft
to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the CWS
Button
INDEX
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active. Refer to the Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Section for more information on VNV flight plans.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations when
VNV flight planning is available. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta (Figure 7-11).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Required
Vertical Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
APPENDICES
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-12). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical Speed
Indication
(RVSI)
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
APPENDICES
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
INDEX
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-13 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
EIS
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-12).
AFCS
NOTE: When the Selected Altitude is set to the VNV Target Altitude, Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)
will be armed even though the altitude value is part of the active VNAV flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In
This Case, Equal To
VNV Altitude Target)
EIS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-14 VNV Altitude Capture
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture mode
are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending on
which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management Section
for details).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
AFCS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP+V, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight
plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
APPENDICES
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
INDEX
3) Press the APR Key.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
EIS
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Glidepath
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
AFCS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
EIS
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
460
Glideslope
Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Takeoff and Go Around modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude. The TO/GA
Switch is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on whether the aircraft
is on the ground. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when the aircraft is at least 400 feet
below the Selected altitude at the time Takeoff or Go Around Mode is selected.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude. Autopilot engagement while Takeoff Mode is active is inhibited while the aircraft is on the
ground.
EIS
Pressing the TO/GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with
the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys or CWS Button) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Go Around Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 seconds
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-19 Go Around Mode
APPENDICES
Takeoff Mode Active
Figure 7-20 Takeoff Mode
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around modes.
NOTE: The AFCS may generate a lower bank angle than the maximum roll command limit in degrees
indicated in table 7-3 by the amount needed to produce a turn rate equal to or less than standard rate.
EIS
Lateral Mode
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
Roll Hold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Description
Heading Select *
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, GPS *
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track *
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
25°
HDG
25°
GPS
30°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
30°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
VOR
NAV
Key
LOC
BC
Approach, GPS
GPS
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
AFCS
ROL
Navigation, Backcourse Capture/Track
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Takeoff
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC, BC)
Go Around
Level
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, APR Key
LOC)
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on the ground in
TO/GA
preparation for takeoff
Switch
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
Commands wings level with zero
LVL
degree pitch angle
Button
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VAPP
LOC
TO
Wings Level
GA
Wings Level
LVL
Wings Level
APPENDICES
* The Heading, Navigation GPS and Navigation VOR mode maximum roll command limit will be limited to the Low Bank
mode value if it is engaged.
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
INDEX
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls wings level.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
EIS
Figure 7-21 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a cyan bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Indicate
Required Turn Toward
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-22 Heading Select Mode
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode (Figure 7-25).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode
Figure 7-23 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed prior
to the automatic source switch.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
APPENDICES
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Left Turn
to Track GPS Course and Climb to
Intercept Selected Altitude
Selected
Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-24 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
INDEX
Figure 7-25 Backcourse Mode
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Navigation
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button
is released.
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-26 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
APPENDICES
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
4) Press the APR Key.
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
EIS
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button
is released.
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
AFCS
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.6 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Piper PA-34-220T Seneca autopilot and optional yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to
provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands
received from the flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any
sustained effort required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper for the Piper
PA-34-220T Seneca.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec
by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT CONTROL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AFCS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
APPENDICES
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot engagement.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated
and the annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot and yaw damper are illuminated. The flight
director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
EIS
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Engaged Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-27 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
When the YD Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot and the yaw
damper annunciator light is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
AFCS
Control Wheel Steering
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-28 CWS Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Pressing the AP Key does not disengage the yaw damper.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot may be manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC, GA, MEPT Switch, or the AP Key on
the AFCS Control Unit. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation
and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. The AP DISC or MEPT Switch may be used to cancel the
aural alert.
EIS
Figure 7-29 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The YD Key, MEYT and AP DISC Switches can be used to disengage the yaw damper (the autopilot, if
engaged, also disengages when the AP DISC Switch is pressed). The ‘YD’ and ‘AP’ annunciations turn yellow
and flash for 5 seconds upon disengagement.
Figure 7-30 Yaw Damper Disengagement
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or MEPT Switch.
Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• Stall warning
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
• Roll Trim input
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System failure
AFCS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-31 Automatic Autopilot and
Yaw Damper Disengagement
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LEVEL MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Level Mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes
when active. Pressing the LVL Key (located on the instrument panel) engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is
disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes.
While Level Mode does not track altitude or heading, it will adjust the pitch angle to maintain zero vertical
speed. When the LVL Key is pressed, all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight
director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll (Figure 7-32). While in level mode, all other modes are available
by pressing the corresponding button.
Pitch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Roll
Command Bars Indicate
Level with the Horizon
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-32 Level Mode Annunciation
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.7 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various Garmin AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B.
Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft
climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
33
3
27
30
27
30
24
24
21
27
24
27
15
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
18
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
V4
9
3
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
V 244
9
6
0
33
15
6
KCOS
KMKC
30
6
3
3
30
33
0
33
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using a GPS flight
plan. The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed
approach is executed.
12
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
15
18
Figure 7-33 Flight Plan Overview
DEPARTURE
AFCS
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Use the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
b) Push the TO/GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up
attitude to follow.
APPENDICES
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP and
NOSE DN Keys, or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft, to establish a new Vertical Speed
Reference.
EIS
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
HD
GM
od
e
TO M
o
de
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
APPENDICES
4
KMKC
1
2
VS
e
Mod
ode
INDEX
M
TO
Figure 7-34 Departure
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
EIS
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
33
3
30
AFCS
Hd
29 g
0o
V4
6
27
3
255
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
24
NA
V
9
o
VO
R
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
1
APPENDICES
21
18
Figure 7-35 Intercepting a VOR Radial
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
0
33
3
V4
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
33
3
30
0
o
075
e
30
d
AV Mo
6
27
GPS N
260
o
15
21
18
24
12
12
AFCS
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
2
24
27
076
1
9
o
e
d
AV Mo
VOR N
15
21
18
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-36 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
DESCENT
APPENDICES
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
INDEX
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Use the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the Airspeed
Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed automatically.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Use the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys, or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft, to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
AFCS
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Figure 7-37 FLC Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
APPENDICES
b) Use the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude 75 feet below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 feet below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director will capture the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS
will be armed rather than ALTV).
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
ALT Mode
TOD
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
VPT
HM
ode
3
AFCS
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Figure 7-38 VPTH Descent
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
APPENDICES
1) Command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV flight plan altitude. Use Flight
Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
INDEX
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
478
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset the Selected Altitude
at or below 9000 ft.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
TH
AFCS
VP
M
od
e
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
ALT Mode
1
C
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
3
ed
De
sce
nt
ALT Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pa
th
TOD
4
VP
TH
Mo
5
BOD
ALT Mode
APPENDICES
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
de
Selected Altitude
3 nm
OPSHN
HABUK
Figure 7-39 Non-path Descent
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH
NOTE: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the AFCS. When
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
EIS
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the autopilot and flight director determine when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The
flight director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
AFCS
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Use the TO/GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
EIS
G
HD
e
od
M
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PYNON
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-40 ILS Approach to KCOS
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
EIS
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Use the TO/GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
482
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
EIS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FALUR
HABUK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
Figure 7-41 LPV Approach to KCOS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the TO/GA Switch at the Decision height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MOGAL
EIS
GPS NAV Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GA Mode
KCOS
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-42 Go Around/Missed Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.8 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFDs above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status
Annunciation
Figure 7-43 AFCS Status Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alert Condition
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pitch Trim Failure
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
AFCS
Yaw Damper Failure
Description
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
YD control failure
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation
Preflight Test
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail
their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
486
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-44 Overspeed Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.9 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SUSPECTED AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as specifics that may
supplement or amplify this procedure.
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the following steps:
EIS
1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed from the trim motor.
Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
OVERPOWERING AUTOPILOT SERVOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied to the pitch controls
when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot
automatic trim to run to an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the
controls should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to run, resulting in an outof-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated
control forces are required after the autopilot is disengaged.
AFCS
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the G1000 Seneca include the following:
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
EIS
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Satellite telephone and SMS messaging services
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Data Logging
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
AFCS
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AOPA and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such
as available services, hours of operation, and lodging options. Either the AOPA or AC-U-KWIK database may be
installed, but not both simultaneously.
Satellite telephone and SMS messaging service is available with an optional subscription service.
APPENDICES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver offers
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
maintenance phase checks or other events in the Messages Window on the PFD.
INDEX
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside the normal flight
envelope.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: SVT requires a terrain database that has a resolution of nine arc-seconds.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑107). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVS or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch ladder increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVT:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
Pathways
Traffic
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI.
An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the
Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Programmed
Altitudes
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Zero Pitch
Line
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Color of
Pathways
match the
CDI color
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in
the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the
SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
498
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways will be
outlined in gray. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be
outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft
gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other
Runway
on Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Selected for
Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Runways
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVS AND TAWS-B ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVS and TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
500
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
TERRAIN
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Displaying field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
502
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
Aircraft
Position
EIS
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Features
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SAFETAXI
Option
INDEX
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
SafeTaxi Database
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
AFCS
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 13S1, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–13 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
INDEX
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Press the PFD1 DB Softkey. The softkey label will change to PFD2 DB. The DATABASE window will now
display database information for PFD2. Again, scroll through the listed information by turning the FMS Knob
or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Date is before Effective Date
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
INDEX
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
ALL
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
512
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the DeKalb Peachtree (KPDK) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
514
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Bravo on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information: the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page
516
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
WX Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart Plan
View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
522
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
INDEX
Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-42 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
528
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is shown.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1303, is deciphered as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
13 – Indicates the year 2013
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–13 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The DISABLES date 28–APR–13 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
530
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Departure Procedures (DP)
EIS
Figure 8-49 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Areas
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
INDEX
Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart
and advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SHW CHRT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
WX
APR
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
AFCS
ALL
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-51 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
APPENDICES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
534
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-55) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-56) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or
INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte,
NC airport has three additional charts offering information: the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and
Take-off Minimums.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Box
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
536
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-56, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-57).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page
538
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Available
on This Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
WX Softkey
Selected
APPENDICES
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-50).
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
540
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
542
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
543
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
544
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-70. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
INDEX
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
546
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1302, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–13 is the first date that this database is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–13 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
INDEX
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
547
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is Before Effective Date
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
548
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-72.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
EIS
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, select the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-72 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory Database
Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
550
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-74.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 13D1, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
EIS
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–13 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory
Data
AFCS
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SATELLITE TELEPHONE SERVICES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides airborne Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging service.
Iridium telephone and text meassaging are available to the flight crew through the MFD, audio panel, and headset.
Operation of these features is accomplished through the AUX-AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS Pages.
REGISTERING THE SYSTEM
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
A subscriber account must be established for each Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium Satellite System
for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver
(GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 8-75. Contact Garmin
Flight Data Services at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-75 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
APPENDICES
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network as well as to or from the telephone
handset in the cabin, when installed. Calls can also be answered or made from the cabin phone, however, only
actions initiated from the cockpit phone will be discussed here. See the cabin handset user guide for more
information. Control and monitoring of telephone functions are accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page.
To view the Telephone Page:
INDEX
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
552
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The PHONE STATUS display, as shown in Figure 8-76, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of voice and/or data transmissions. Table 8-5 describes symbology used on PHONE STATUS display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellite
Signal
Strength
External
Phone
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-76 Phone Status Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM TELEPHONE SYSTEM
The Iridium Satellite Telephone System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-77 Enable Iridium Telephone System
To enable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Enable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
To disable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
EIS
Phone is Idle
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
AFCS
Phone is disabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Phone is reserved for data transmission
APPENDICES
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
INDEX
Table 8-5 Telephone Symbols
554
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INCOMING CALLS
NOTE: Outside callers should dial 00 + 8816 or 8817 + aircraft phone number when calling the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Iridium Telephone System.
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TELEPHONE Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure 8-78 will
be displayed. If the call is from the cabin, CABIN will be displayed as seen in this figure. If the incoming call
is an Iridium network call, IRIDIUM will be displayed. In addition to the pop-up alert, a voice alert, “Incoming
Call”, will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Incoming Call Pop-up
Incoming Call Symbol on MFD Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-78 Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ANSWER Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Selecting
the TEL Softkey will display the AUX-TELEPHONE allowing additional call information to be viewed before
answering.
To mute incoming call alerts:
APPENDICES
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mute Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received. The
mute condition is annunciated on the Telephone Page as shown in Figure 8-79.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite Network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
selecting the ANSWER Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
To make a call:
1) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
EIS
2) Press the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-79 will be shown.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
b) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
c) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Dial a Phone Call’.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-79 Initiating a Call
INDEX
3) Enter the desired number string (typically, country code + area code + phone number) by selecting the number
softkeys on the MFD, pressing the numeric keys on the PFD/MFD Controller, or turning the FMS Knobs. The
system may be configured by an authorized repair facility to automatically enter a default country code when
the dialing window is displayed. To replace the default country code, move the cursor to the first (furthest left)
number in the dialing window and enter the desired country code.
556
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-80.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-80 Make the Call
5) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number, as in Figure 8-81.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Figure 8-81 System is Making the Connection
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-82. To exit the call, press
the HANGUP Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-82 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
AFCS
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the SATELLITE PHONE.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page as shown in Figure 8-83.
558
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-83 Text Messaging Page
Message Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
AFCS
Saved text message, draft not sent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
APPENDICES
System failed to send text message
Predefined text message
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Table 8-6 Text Message Symbols
559
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure
8-84 will be displayed when a new text message is received.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-84 New Text Message Received
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the VIEW Softkey to view the message (Figure 8-85). Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish
the pop-up window and leave the text message unopened. Selecting the IGNR ALL Softkey will extinguish
the pop-window and ignore all future incoming text messages. Selecting the SMS Softkey will display the
AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
INDEX
Figure 8-85 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
560
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-86 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
AFCS
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the REPLY Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Sending a new text message:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the NEW Softkey.
190-01404-01 Rev. B
INDEX
Or:
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-87 Composing a New Text Message
AFCS
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey.
Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be
accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey. See Figure 8-87.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
5) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Press the SEND Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the SAVE Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the CANCEL Softkey to delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
INDEX
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
562
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-88 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’ as shown in Figure 8-88.
3) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED MESSAGES view is now displayed.
4) Press the NEW Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED SMS TEXT MESSAGE Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-89.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-89 Composing a Predefined Message
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
563
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘TITLE’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD
by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey. Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) Press the SAVE Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Selecting the
CANCEL Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Stop Editing Predefined Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
Sending a predefined text message:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the NEW Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey.
Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be
accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey. See Figure 8-90.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field (Figure 8-90).
Figure 8-90 Composing a New Text Message
564
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the PREDEFD Softkey. The PREDEFINED MESSAGE MENU Window is displayed as seen in Figure 8-91.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-91 Predefined Message List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the SEND Softkey to transmit the message.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Show Inbox messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the INBOX Softkey
(Figure 8-92).
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
Figure 8-92 Text Message Inbox
Show Outbox messages:
APPENDICES
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the OUTBOX Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
566
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Show Draft messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the DRAFTS Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
EIS
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the TIME Softkey
(Figure 8-92).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window (Figure 8-92).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the TYPE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the ADDRESS
Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the desired message box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message content is displayed as shown in Figure 8-93.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-93 Viewing Message Content
5) To close the text message, press the CLOSE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
568
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the MRK READ Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
EIS
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Delete a message:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the DELETE Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
569
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM WX Satellite Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link
Receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-94)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to
the GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further
information.
APPENDICES
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
INDEX
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
570
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather
Products
Window
AFCS
If XM WX Satllite Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on
the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather
Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-94 XM Information Page
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
571
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
EIS
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
AFCS
Figure 8-95 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
APPENDICES
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
572
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
EIS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-96 Categories List
APPENDICES
PRESETS
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
573
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting a preset channel number:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
3) Press the SET Softkey.
EIS
4) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Select MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Select SET
to Save Each
Preset Channel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-97 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
AFCS
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-98 Volume Control
Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
574
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, AltimeterTransponder, or Hot Section Inspection or Phase 1 Maintenance Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD.
Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero
(one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set
to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is
cycled, all messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-99 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
APPENDICES
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
575
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
MSG Softkey label flashes. Selecting the MSG Softkey opens the Messages Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. Selecting the MSG Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the
scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-100 PFD Messages Window
576
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging.
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• Selected course
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• CDI deflection
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Manifold Pressure
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Propeller RPM
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Turbine Inlet Temperature
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
APPENDICES
• Ground Speed (kts)
• GPS vertical alert limit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
AFCS
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• GPS fix
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
577
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-101. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
EIS
log_130210_104506_KIXD.csv
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-101 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
578
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.10 ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION (ESP™)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) is an optional feature that is intended to discourage the exceedance of
attitude and established airspeed parameters. This feature will only function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL
and the autopilot is not engaged.
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, Vmo, and/or Mmo) beyond the normal
flight parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control
surface to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control
movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
EIS
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed, the force increases (up to an established
maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude and/or
airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant up
to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When ESP has been engaged for more than ten seconds (cumulative; not necessarily consecutive seconds) of a
20-second interval, the autopilot is automatically engaged with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft
into level flight. An aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation will indicate
‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding either the Control Wheel Steering (CWS) or Autopilot
Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing the CWS or AP DISC switch, ESP force will again be applied,
provided aircraft attitude and/or airspeed are within their respective engagement limits. ESP can also be overridden
by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page on the MFD.
To enable or disable ESP™:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, select the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page. If the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the STABILITY & PROTECTION field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘ENABLE’ or ‘DISABLE’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
579
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage
(see Figure 8-102). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move
to 30°, as shown in Figure 8-103. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as roll
attitude decreases.
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Figure 8-102 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
APPENDICES
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
INDEX
Figure 8-103 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
580
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in Figure 8-104. The force
increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended to
encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
10º
0º
10º
20º
º
30
º
EIS
90º
90º
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
75º
75º
º
60
60
º
º
45
45
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
º
30
20º
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-104 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(Figure 8-105).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-105 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
581
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ESP engages at 18° nose-up and 17° nose-down. Once ESP is engaged, it will apply opposing force between
15° and 50° nose-up and between 12° and 50° nose-down, as indicated in Figure 8-106. Maximum opposing
force is applied between 25° and 50° nose-up and between 22° and 50° nose-down.
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
APPENDICES
50˚
45˚
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
50˚
25˚
25˚
20˚
20˚
15˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.
35˚
40˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
Figure 8-106 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
INDEX
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
Exceeding Vmo or Mmo will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high
airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
582
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
EIS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• Terrain-SVS or TAWS-B function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-107 SVT Reversionary Mode
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
583
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
Figure 8-108 Unusual Attitude Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
AFCS
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-109 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
584
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the Aux Audio In jack(s) because this would prevent SiriusXM Satellite
Radio from being heard
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-110 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
585
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page SiriusXM subscription is not activated
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 8-7 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
586
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• CAS Window: The CAS Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert levels
described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed
Indicator. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
EIS
• MESSAGES Window: The MESSAGES Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the MSG Softkey displays the MESSAGES Window. Pressing the MSG Softkey a second time removes
the MESSAGES Window from the display. When the MESSAGES Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be
used to scroll through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the MSG Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to
accompany an alert. If alerts are still present, the MSG label is displayed in white with black text. Pressing the
MSG Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G1000 System Annunciations Section for more information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
CAS
Window
APPENDICES
Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MESSAGES
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. Should the #1 GIA 63W fail, audio and voice
alerts are not generated. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX - System Status Page.
587
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
Press to Test
Annunciation Tone
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure A-2 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing
588
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAS MESSAGES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following messages are configured specifically for the Piper Seneca. Red CAS window text signifies
warnings, yellow text signifies cautions, and white text signifies advisories. See the POH for recommended
pilot actions.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent some CAS messages from being displayed during certain conditions. Two examples are as
follows:
EIS
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., BAGGAGE DOOR warning and
BAGGAGE DOOR advisory) only the higher alert level is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited.
WARNING MESSAGES
Audio Alert
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
L START ENGD
Left engine starter motor energized when engine is running
Triple Chime
R START ENGD
GEAR SYS
Right engine starter motor energized when engine is running
A failure of a gear system component has been detected
Landing gear are not down and locked or landing gear is selected UP on the
ground
Heater unit has sensed an overheat condition
Forward baggage door is not closed
Propeller heat failure*
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
Triple Chime
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HTR OVERHEAT
BAGGAGE DOOR
PROP HEAT FAIL
* Optional
Triple Chime
AFCS
CHECK GEAR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Description
Left engine CHT in warning range
Right engine CHT in warning range
Left Alternator failure
Right Alternator failure
Left fuel quantity in warning range
Right fuel quantity in warning range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAS Window Text
L ENG CHT
R ENG CHT
L ALTR FAIL
R ALTR FAIL
L FUEL QTY
R FUEL QTY
CAUTION MESSAGES
Left fuel quantity in caution range
Right fuel quantity in caution range
Pitot heat failure
Pitot heat selected OFF
A failure of a gear system component has been detected
Landing gear are not down and locked
Hydraulic pump is running when it should not be running
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
Audio Alert
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Description
APPENDICES
CAS Window Text
L FUEL QTY
R FUEL QTY
PITOT HEAT FAIL
PITOT HEAT OFF
GEAR SYS
CHECK GEAR
HYDR PUMP ON
589
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS Window Text
SURF DEICE FAIL
VACUUM PRESS LOW
AC DOOR OPEN
OXYGEN LOW
* Optional
Description
Surface de-ice system failure*
Vacuum system pressure abnormal*
Air conditioning condenser door is open during inflight engine failure condition*
Oxygen pressure in caution range*
Audio Alert
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
ADVISORY MESSAGES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
CAS Window Text
EMERG BATT ON
FUEL IMBAL
FUEL X-FEED ON
MAINT MODE ON
MFD FAN FAIL
PFD1 FAN FAIL
PFD2 FAN FAIL
AV FAN FAIL
SURF DEICE ON
L VAC FAIL
R VAC FAIL
AC DOOR OPEN
BAGGAGE DOOR
* Optional
Description
Emergency power in use
Fuel imbalance (left vs. right tank quantity)
Fuel cross-feed valve selected open
Maintenance Mode ON
MFD display fan is inoperative
PFD1 display fan is inoperative
PFD2 display fan is inoperative
Aviation cooling fan is inoperative
Surface de-ice normal cycle is active*
Left engine vacuum pump failure*
Right engine vacuum pump failure*
Air conditioning condenser door is open*
Forward baggage door is not closed
Audio Alert
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
AFCS
SYSTEM MESSAGES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Messages Window Text
Description
INCOMING CALL
Incoming Iridium voice call*
WOW MISCOMPARE
Left and right squat switches do not agree
* Optional
COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATIONS
APPENDICES
Annunciation
ALT MISCOMP
IAS MISCOMP
INDEX
HDG MISCOMP
PIT MISCOMP
ROL MISCOMP
590
Condition
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 knots, this is inhibited.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 10 kts.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 7 kts.
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Condition
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
No data from one or both heading sensors.
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
No data from one or both roll sensors..
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation
ALT NO COMP
IAS NO COMP
HDG NO COMP
PIT NO COMP
ROL NO COMP
Comparator
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reversionary Sensor
Window
Figure A-3 Comparator and Reversionary Sensor Annunciation Windows
REVERSIONARY SENSOR ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Condition
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number one Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number two Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number one Attitude & Heading Reference System.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number two Attitude & Heading Reference System.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number one GPS receiver.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number two GPS receiver.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 GPS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 GPS.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Annunciation
BOTH ON ADC1
BOTH ON ADC2
BOTH ON AHRS1
BOTH ON AHRS2
BOTH ON GPS1
BOTH ON GPS2
USING ADC1
USING ADC2
USING AHRS1
USING AHRS2
USING GPS1
USING GPS2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in the Reversionary Sensor Window, as shown in Figure A-3.
These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey
gives access to ADC1, ADC2, AHRS1, and AHRS2 Softkeys. These softkeys allow manual switching of sensors. In
the case of certain types of sensor failures, the G1000 may make some sensor selections automatically. The GPS
sensor cannot be switched manually.
MISCELLANEOUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Pitch trim in motion is annunciated as shown in Figure A-4.
INDEX
Pitch Trim in Motion Annunciation
Figure A-4 Pitch Trim in Motion Annunciation
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
591
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Figure A-5 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
GDU Software or
Database Mismatch
AFCS
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
Figure A-5 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
APPENDICES
a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
592
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
Comment
System Annunciation
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Other Various Red X
Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
CDI is not receiving valid data
from the corresponding GIA.
Does not apply when the CDI is
set to GPS.
Display system is not receiving
valid ISA information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions
of the navigation database
installed in the PFD and MFD.
A cross-talk error between the
PFD and MFD will also cause
this annunciation.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This annunciation is only seen
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
INDEX
Table A-1 G1000 System Annunciations
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
593
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section describes various G1000 system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by the
EIS
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD2 SERVICE – PFD2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD2 CONFIG – PFD2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD2 COOLING – PFD2 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
594
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFDs with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFDs are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFDs have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
EIS
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] Key
is stuck.
PFD2 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] Key
is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [key name] Key
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PFD2 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to
reload the navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain database
error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain database
missing.
595
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 airport terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
APPENDICES
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the
specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFDs detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional
feature). Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
INDEX
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Airport Directory
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
database error exists.
should be serviced.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 Airport Directory
database error exists.
596
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
Comments
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions installed.
mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or
regions. Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization
function not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off,
then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFDs and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFDs and MFD have different airport terrain database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active navigation System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database updated.
database.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1, PFD2 or MFD1] One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the
Terrain awareness display unavailable. specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
error. Config service req’d.
The system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch. Communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be
serviced when possible.
AFCS
Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
597
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
598
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be
serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should
be serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
EIS
COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM1 and/or COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
AFCS
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
Message
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 configuration
error.
COM2 CONFIG– COM2 configuration
error.
MANIFEST– COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST– COM2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
599
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
MANIFEST – NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – NAV2 software
mismatch, communication halted
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Comments
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
NAV1 and/or NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA2 CONFIG – GEA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GEA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The GEA2 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #2 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – XPDR1 is
unable to transmit ADS-B messages.
600
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
GTX 33ES only. ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid
GPS position. Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2 not receiving
airspeed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
AHRS2 SRVC – AHRS2 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GRS2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
190-01404-01 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
601
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GDL 69A MESSAGE ADVISORIES (OPTIONAL)
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
communication halted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC2 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 AS EC – ADC2 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GDC2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTS 825 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (OPTIONAL)
INDEX
Message
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTS software mismatch,
communication halted.
602
Comments
GTS 825 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GTS 825 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GWX 68 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (OPTIONAL)
A failure has been detected in the GWX 68. The GWX 68 may still be usable.
The GWX 68 indicates severe weather within ±10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.
EIS
GWX SERVICE – Needs service.
Return unit for repair.
WX ALERT – Possible severe weather
ahead.
MANIFEST – GWX software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GWX 68 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX 68 or the GWX 68 is reporting
a fault. The GWX 68 radar system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error.
Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.
The GWX 68 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Message
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GSR 56 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
A failure has been detected in the #1 GSR 56. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
AFCS
190-01404-01 Rev. B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
603
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
AFCS
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS
navigation to [xxxx].
Comments
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
failed.
should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed. A data path connected to the GDU, GDL 69A, or the GIA 63/W has failed.
604
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-34-220T Seneca
190-01404-01 Rev. B
APPENDIX A
EIS
The aircraft is flying away from the selected course and will not intercept.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The audio source for terrain awareness is offline. Check GIA1 or GIA 2.
Terrain audio alerts are not configured properly. The system should be serviced
AFCS
Expect Further Clearance (EFC) time has expired for the User Defined Hold.
Altimeter setting is not the same on PFD1 and PFD2. Synchronize settings for VNAV
guidance.
TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arc-second or
better) is not currently installed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Electronic Stability and Protection has been disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
page.
The ESP function has failed and is inoperative. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
ESP FAIL – ESP is inoperative.
ESP DEGRADE – ESP IAS mode is
inoperative.
ESP CONFIG – ESP config error.
Config service req’d.
Comments
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of suffic